View
33
Download
15
Category
Preview:
Citation preview
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
Declension of Nouns Pronouns and Verbs
Numbers and Time
Study Questions and Answers
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 2 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
Declension of Nouns Pronouns and Verbs
Numbers and Time
Study Questions and Answers
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford and E J Burford
Jaspell 2 Pilcox Hall Lane Tendring Clacton-on-Sea Essex CO16 0DL
(44) (0) 1255 830825
(44) (0) 7949 250403
burfordjaspellcouk
wwwjaspellcouk
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 3 21 March 2014
CONTENTS
Page Subject
4 Introduction
4 Styles
4 Scripts
4 Pronunciation Hints
5 The Bengali Alphabet
5 Sound Chart
6 Pronunciation of Vowels
7 Pronunciation of Consonants
9 Writing of Syllables
9 Leading Vowel Forms
10 Trailing Vowel Forms
12 Hints on Special Pronunciation
13 Declension of Singular Pronouns
14 Declension of Plural Pronouns
15 Notes on Declension of Pronouns and Nouns
17 Verbs like ldquokaraardquo ldquoকরাrdquo [Grammar 533]
19 Verbs like ldquokhaaoyaardquo ldquoকরাrdquo [Grammar 534]
21 Verbs like ldquokaraardquo ldquoকরাrdquo [Grammar 535]
24 Verb families declined for ldquotuirdquo ldquoতইrdquo and ldquotoraardquo ldquoততারাrdquo
25 Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
26 Fractions
27 Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [Grammar 573]
28 Approximation [Grammar 574]
29 Months and Seasons
30 Dates
31 Times and Seasons
33-
63
Study Review Questions and Answers
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 4 21 March 2014
INTRODUCTION
Bengali Styles The common or ldquoChalitordquo style of Bengali is given first
( ) Where the Bengali word in literary or classical (ldquoSadhu Bhaasaardquo)
style is different from the chalito form this is given after it in round
brackets
Two Bengali Scripts - Bengali Script and Romanized
Bengali meanings are given both in Bengali script and in a Romanized
form
Romanized Form This helps beginners to use the language until they have mastered the
script The romanized form differs from systems used by other writers
but has the advantage of providing a consistent system of phonetic
conversion from Bengali script that represents each Bengali character
element precisely and uniquely Its appearance reflects the
pronunciation closelymdashafter accepting a few simple transcription
rules
Pronunciation Hints [ ] Hints are sometimes given in square brackets where words have ceased
being pronounced truly phoneticallymdashmainly in cases where two
consonants are joined into ldquoconjunctsrdquo and the initial consonant is
emphasized while the trailing consonant is effectively lost See
sections below on ldquoBengali Alphabetrdquo and ldquoHints on Special
Pronunciationrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 5 21 March 2014
THE BENGALI ALPHABET
CLASSIFICATION OF BENGALI SOUNDS
C O N S O N A N T S V O W E L S
Family Hard Soft Soft Soft Hard
Held
Huffed
Held
Huffed
Nasals Semi-
vowels
Spirants Short Long Diphthongs
Guttural ka | kha ga | gha nsup1a ha hha a aa e | ei ee oy
ক খ গ ঘ ঙ হ ঃ অ আ এ ঐ Palatal ca | cha ja | jha nsup2a ya sha i ii
চ ছ জ ঝ ঞ য় শ ই ঈ Cerebral ta | tha da | dha na Ra sa rri
ট ঠ ড ঢ ণ র ষ ঋ ra | rha ya
ড ঢ য Dental ta | tha da | dha na La sa
ত থ দধ ন ল স Labial pa | pha ba | bha ma ba hha u uu o | oo au
প ফ ব ভ ম ব ঃ উ ঊ ও ঔ Others ndeg n^
ঃ ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 6 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS
VOWELS
INDEPENDENT OR INITIAL VOWELS SHAPE BEHIND A
CONSONANT (SUCH
AS ldquoপrdquo ldquopardquo)
Character Roman Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in
the
English
word
(no
vowel)
(no
sound) প p (ldquop rdquo)
অ a
short ldquoardquo
short ldquoordquo
(inherent
a)
ldquowanderrdquo
ldquooffrdquo
প pa
আ aa long ldquoardquo ldquofarrdquo পা paa
অযা a flat ldquoardquo ldquoapplerdquo পযা pa pyaa
ই i short ldquoirdquo ldquofillrdquo পপ pi
ঈ ii long ldquoirdquo ldquofeelrdquo পী pii
উ u short ldquourdquo ldquopullrdquo প pu
ঊ uu long ldquooordquo ldquopoolrdquo প puu
ঋ rri short ldquorirdquo ldquotriplerdquo প prri
এ e short ldquoerdquo ldquoeggrdquo পপ pe
ঐ ee long ldquooirdquo ldquoboilrdquo পপ pee (ldquopoirdquo)
ও o short ldquoordquo ldquoonrdquo পপা po
ঔ oo long ldquoordquo ldquoownerrdquo
ldquonowrdquo পপৌ poo
(ldquopaupowrdquo)
ঃ nordm nasal ldquongrdquo ldquosingerrdquo প pandeg
(ldquopangrdquo)
ঃ hh abrupt ldquohrdquo ldquoJudahrdquo প pahh
ঃ ^ nasal
faintly as
in French
ldquononrdquo
প p^a (ldquopanrdquo)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 7 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS
CONSONANTS
Group Char-
acter Roman
Form
Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in the
English word
Guttural ক k ldquokrdquo in ldquokeenrdquo
- in the
throat খ kh ldquokhrdquo in ldquorockheadrdquo
গ g ldquogrdquo in ldquogetrdquo
ঘ gh ldquoghrdquo in ldquoslagheaprdquo
ঙ nsup1 ldquonrdquo in ldquodonkeyrdquo
Palatal চ c ldquochrdquo in ldquochairrdquo
- on the
palate ছ ch chhrdquo in
ldquomatchheadrdquo
জ j ldquojrdquo in ldquoenjoyrdquo
ঝ jh ldquodgehrdquo in ldquohedgehogrdquo
ঞ nsup2 ldquonrdquo in ldquopinchrdquo
Cerebral ট t ldquotrdquo in ldquoalterrdquo
- on the
roof ঠ th ldquothrdquo in
ldquomalthouserdquo
of the
mouth ড d ldquodrdquo in ldquoDadrdquo
ড r ldquorrrdquo in ldquobarredrdquo
ঢ dh ldquodhrdquo in
ldquogoldhammerrdquo
ঢ rh ldquorrhrdquo in ldquomyrrh
lumprdquo
ণ n ldquonrdquo in ldquoinlaidrdquo
Dental ত (ৎ) t ldquotrdquo in ldquoantrdquo
- on the
teeth থ th ldquothrdquo in ldquowarthogrdquo
দ d ldquodrdquo in ldquobedsrdquo
ধ dh ldquodhrdquo in ldquoredheadsrdquo
ন n ldquonrdquo in ldquobendingrdquo
Labial প p ldquoprdquo in ldquopeacerdquo
- on the
lips ফ ph ldquophrdquo in ldquoupholdrdquo
ব bvw ldquobrdquo in
ldquobobrdquo(ldquoswim
twinrdquo)
ভ bh ldquobhrdquo in ldquonibholderrdquo
ম m ldquomrdquo in ldquomeetrdquo
য y ldquojrdquo in ldquojogrdquo
Forward য় y ldquoyrdquo in ldquoyesrdquo
semi-
vowels র r ldquorrdquo in ldquorightrdquo
ল l ldquolrdquo in ldquoloverdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 8 21 March 2014
Sibillants শ sh ldquoshrdquo in ldquoshiprdquo
ষ s ldquoshrdquo in ldquowashtubrdquo
স s ldquoshrdquo in ldquoensurerdquo
Guttural
semi-
vowel
হ h ldquohrdquo in ldquoheartrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 9 21 March 2014
WRITING OF SYLLABLES
Vowel Leading Form Independent or as Initial Followed by a Non-Vowel
LEADING VOWEL FORMS
+ndeg +hha +^ +p` +pa
etc
+rpa
etc
a+ অ অ অ অপ অপ অপপ
aa+ আ আ আ আপ আপ আপপ
a+ অযা অযা অযা অযাপ অযাপ অযাপপ
i+ ই ই ই ইপ ইপ ইপপ
ii+ ঈ ঈ ঈ ঈপ ঈপ ঈপপ
u+ উ উ উ উপ উপ উপপ
uu+ ঊ ঊ ঊ ঊপ ঊপ ঊপপ
rri+ ঋ ঋ ঋ ঋপ ঋপ ঋপপ
e+ এ এ এ এপ এপ এপপ
ee+ ঐ ঐ ঐ ঐপ ঐপ ঐপপ
o+ ও ও ও ওপ ওপ ওপপ
oo+ ঔ ঔ ঔ ঔপ ঔপ ঔপপ
ndeg+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
hh+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
^+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 10 21 March 2014
Vowel Trailing (Also referred to as ldquoVowel Form Following a Consonantrdquo)
TRAILING VOWEL FORMS
+
`
+
a
+
aa
+
i
+
ii
+
u
+
u
+
rri
+
e
+
ee
+
o
+
oo
+
ndeg k ক ক কা পক কী ক ক ক পক পক পকা পকৌ ক kh খ খ খা পখ খী খ খ খ পখ পখ পখা পখৌ খ g গ গ গা পগ গী গ গ গ পগ পগ পগা পগৌ গ gh ঘ ঘ ঘা পঘ ঘী ঘ ঘ ঘ পঘ পঘ পঘা পঘৌ ঘ nsup1 ঙ ঙ ঙা পঙ ঙী ঙ ঙ ঙ পঙ পঙ পঙা পঙৌ ঙ c চ চ চা পচ চী চ চ চ পচ পচ পচা পচৌ চ ch ছ ছ ছা পছ পছ ছ ছ ছ পছ পছ পছা পছৌ ছ j জ জ জা পজ জী জ জ জ পজ পজ পজা পজৌ জ jh ঝ ঝ ঝা পঝ ঝী ঝ ঝ ঝ পঝ পঝ পঝা পঝৌ ঝ nsup2 ঞ ঞ ঞা পঞ ঞী ঞ ঞ ঞ পঞ পঞ পঞা পঞৌ ঞ t ট ট টা টি টী ট ট ট পট পট পটা পটৌ ট th ঠ ঠ ঠা ঠি ঠী ঠ ঠ ঠ পঠ পঠ পঠা পঠৌ ঠ d ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড dh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ r ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড rh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ n ণ ণ ণা পণ ণী ণ ণ ণ পণ পণ পণা পণৌ ণ t ত=ৎ ত তা পত তী ত ত ত পত পত পতা পতৌ ত th থ থ থা পথ থী থ থ থ পথ পথ পথা পথৌ থ d দ দ দা পদ দী দ দ দ পদ পদ পদা পদৌ দ dh ধ ধ ধা পধ ধী ধ ধ ধ পধ পধ পধা পধৌ ধ n ন ন না পন নী ন ন ন পন পন পনা পনৌ ন p প প পা পপ পী প প প পপ পপ পপা পপৌ প ph ফ ফ ফা পফ ফী ফ ফ ফ পফ পফ পফা পফৌ ফ b ব ব বা পব বী ব ব ব পব পব পবা পবৌ ব bh ভ ভ ভা পভ ভী ভ ভ ভ পভ পভ পভা পভৌ ভ m ম ম মা পম মী ম ম ম পম পম পমা পমৌ ম y য য যা পয যী য য য পয পয পযা পযৌ য y য় য় য়া পয় য়ী য় য় য় পয় পয় পয়া পয়ৌ য় r র র রা পর রী র র পর পর পরা পরৌ র l ল ল লা পল লী ল ল ল পল পল পলা পলৌ ল sh শ শ শা পশ শী শ শ শ পশ পশ পশা পশৌ শ s ষ ষ ষা পষ ষী ষ ষ ষ পষ পষ পষা পষৌ ষ s স স সা পস সী স স স পস পস পসা পসৌ স h হ হ হা পহ হী হ হ হ পহ পহ পহা পহৌ হ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 2 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
Declension of Nouns Pronouns and Verbs
Numbers and Time
Study Questions and Answers
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford and E J Burford
Jaspell 2 Pilcox Hall Lane Tendring Clacton-on-Sea Essex CO16 0DL
(44) (0) 1255 830825
(44) (0) 7949 250403
burfordjaspellcouk
wwwjaspellcouk
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 3 21 March 2014
CONTENTS
Page Subject
4 Introduction
4 Styles
4 Scripts
4 Pronunciation Hints
5 The Bengali Alphabet
5 Sound Chart
6 Pronunciation of Vowels
7 Pronunciation of Consonants
9 Writing of Syllables
9 Leading Vowel Forms
10 Trailing Vowel Forms
12 Hints on Special Pronunciation
13 Declension of Singular Pronouns
14 Declension of Plural Pronouns
15 Notes on Declension of Pronouns and Nouns
17 Verbs like ldquokaraardquo ldquoকরাrdquo [Grammar 533]
19 Verbs like ldquokhaaoyaardquo ldquoকরাrdquo [Grammar 534]
21 Verbs like ldquokaraardquo ldquoকরাrdquo [Grammar 535]
24 Verb families declined for ldquotuirdquo ldquoতইrdquo and ldquotoraardquo ldquoততারাrdquo
25 Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
26 Fractions
27 Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [Grammar 573]
28 Approximation [Grammar 574]
29 Months and Seasons
30 Dates
31 Times and Seasons
33-
63
Study Review Questions and Answers
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 4 21 March 2014
INTRODUCTION
Bengali Styles The common or ldquoChalitordquo style of Bengali is given first
( ) Where the Bengali word in literary or classical (ldquoSadhu Bhaasaardquo)
style is different from the chalito form this is given after it in round
brackets
Two Bengali Scripts - Bengali Script and Romanized
Bengali meanings are given both in Bengali script and in a Romanized
form
Romanized Form This helps beginners to use the language until they have mastered the
script The romanized form differs from systems used by other writers
but has the advantage of providing a consistent system of phonetic
conversion from Bengali script that represents each Bengali character
element precisely and uniquely Its appearance reflects the
pronunciation closelymdashafter accepting a few simple transcription
rules
Pronunciation Hints [ ] Hints are sometimes given in square brackets where words have ceased
being pronounced truly phoneticallymdashmainly in cases where two
consonants are joined into ldquoconjunctsrdquo and the initial consonant is
emphasized while the trailing consonant is effectively lost See
sections below on ldquoBengali Alphabetrdquo and ldquoHints on Special
Pronunciationrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 5 21 March 2014
THE BENGALI ALPHABET
CLASSIFICATION OF BENGALI SOUNDS
C O N S O N A N T S V O W E L S
Family Hard Soft Soft Soft Hard
Held
Huffed
Held
Huffed
Nasals Semi-
vowels
Spirants Short Long Diphthongs
Guttural ka | kha ga | gha nsup1a ha hha a aa e | ei ee oy
ক খ গ ঘ ঙ হ ঃ অ আ এ ঐ Palatal ca | cha ja | jha nsup2a ya sha i ii
চ ছ জ ঝ ঞ য় শ ই ঈ Cerebral ta | tha da | dha na Ra sa rri
ট ঠ ড ঢ ণ র ষ ঋ ra | rha ya
ড ঢ য Dental ta | tha da | dha na La sa
ত থ দধ ন ল স Labial pa | pha ba | bha ma ba hha u uu o | oo au
প ফ ব ভ ম ব ঃ উ ঊ ও ঔ Others ndeg n^
ঃ ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 6 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS
VOWELS
INDEPENDENT OR INITIAL VOWELS SHAPE BEHIND A
CONSONANT (SUCH
AS ldquoপrdquo ldquopardquo)
Character Roman Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in
the
English
word
(no
vowel)
(no
sound) প p (ldquop rdquo)
অ a
short ldquoardquo
short ldquoordquo
(inherent
a)
ldquowanderrdquo
ldquooffrdquo
প pa
আ aa long ldquoardquo ldquofarrdquo পা paa
অযা a flat ldquoardquo ldquoapplerdquo পযা pa pyaa
ই i short ldquoirdquo ldquofillrdquo পপ pi
ঈ ii long ldquoirdquo ldquofeelrdquo পী pii
উ u short ldquourdquo ldquopullrdquo প pu
ঊ uu long ldquooordquo ldquopoolrdquo প puu
ঋ rri short ldquorirdquo ldquotriplerdquo প prri
এ e short ldquoerdquo ldquoeggrdquo পপ pe
ঐ ee long ldquooirdquo ldquoboilrdquo পপ pee (ldquopoirdquo)
ও o short ldquoordquo ldquoonrdquo পপা po
ঔ oo long ldquoordquo ldquoownerrdquo
ldquonowrdquo পপৌ poo
(ldquopaupowrdquo)
ঃ nordm nasal ldquongrdquo ldquosingerrdquo প pandeg
(ldquopangrdquo)
ঃ hh abrupt ldquohrdquo ldquoJudahrdquo প pahh
ঃ ^ nasal
faintly as
in French
ldquononrdquo
প p^a (ldquopanrdquo)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 7 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS
CONSONANTS
Group Char-
acter Roman
Form
Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in the
English word
Guttural ক k ldquokrdquo in ldquokeenrdquo
- in the
throat খ kh ldquokhrdquo in ldquorockheadrdquo
গ g ldquogrdquo in ldquogetrdquo
ঘ gh ldquoghrdquo in ldquoslagheaprdquo
ঙ nsup1 ldquonrdquo in ldquodonkeyrdquo
Palatal চ c ldquochrdquo in ldquochairrdquo
- on the
palate ছ ch chhrdquo in
ldquomatchheadrdquo
জ j ldquojrdquo in ldquoenjoyrdquo
ঝ jh ldquodgehrdquo in ldquohedgehogrdquo
ঞ nsup2 ldquonrdquo in ldquopinchrdquo
Cerebral ট t ldquotrdquo in ldquoalterrdquo
- on the
roof ঠ th ldquothrdquo in
ldquomalthouserdquo
of the
mouth ড d ldquodrdquo in ldquoDadrdquo
ড r ldquorrrdquo in ldquobarredrdquo
ঢ dh ldquodhrdquo in
ldquogoldhammerrdquo
ঢ rh ldquorrhrdquo in ldquomyrrh
lumprdquo
ণ n ldquonrdquo in ldquoinlaidrdquo
Dental ত (ৎ) t ldquotrdquo in ldquoantrdquo
- on the
teeth থ th ldquothrdquo in ldquowarthogrdquo
দ d ldquodrdquo in ldquobedsrdquo
ধ dh ldquodhrdquo in ldquoredheadsrdquo
ন n ldquonrdquo in ldquobendingrdquo
Labial প p ldquoprdquo in ldquopeacerdquo
- on the
lips ফ ph ldquophrdquo in ldquoupholdrdquo
ব bvw ldquobrdquo in
ldquobobrdquo(ldquoswim
twinrdquo)
ভ bh ldquobhrdquo in ldquonibholderrdquo
ম m ldquomrdquo in ldquomeetrdquo
য y ldquojrdquo in ldquojogrdquo
Forward য় y ldquoyrdquo in ldquoyesrdquo
semi-
vowels র r ldquorrdquo in ldquorightrdquo
ল l ldquolrdquo in ldquoloverdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 8 21 March 2014
Sibillants শ sh ldquoshrdquo in ldquoshiprdquo
ষ s ldquoshrdquo in ldquowashtubrdquo
স s ldquoshrdquo in ldquoensurerdquo
Guttural
semi-
vowel
হ h ldquohrdquo in ldquoheartrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 9 21 March 2014
WRITING OF SYLLABLES
Vowel Leading Form Independent or as Initial Followed by a Non-Vowel
LEADING VOWEL FORMS
+ndeg +hha +^ +p` +pa
etc
+rpa
etc
a+ অ অ অ অপ অপ অপপ
aa+ আ আ আ আপ আপ আপপ
a+ অযা অযা অযা অযাপ অযাপ অযাপপ
i+ ই ই ই ইপ ইপ ইপপ
ii+ ঈ ঈ ঈ ঈপ ঈপ ঈপপ
u+ উ উ উ উপ উপ উপপ
uu+ ঊ ঊ ঊ ঊপ ঊপ ঊপপ
rri+ ঋ ঋ ঋ ঋপ ঋপ ঋপপ
e+ এ এ এ এপ এপ এপপ
ee+ ঐ ঐ ঐ ঐপ ঐপ ঐপপ
o+ ও ও ও ওপ ওপ ওপপ
oo+ ঔ ঔ ঔ ঔপ ঔপ ঔপপ
ndeg+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
hh+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
^+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 10 21 March 2014
Vowel Trailing (Also referred to as ldquoVowel Form Following a Consonantrdquo)
TRAILING VOWEL FORMS
+
`
+
a
+
aa
+
i
+
ii
+
u
+
u
+
rri
+
e
+
ee
+
o
+
oo
+
ndeg k ক ক কা পক কী ক ক ক পক পক পকা পকৌ ক kh খ খ খা পখ খী খ খ খ পখ পখ পখা পখৌ খ g গ গ গা পগ গী গ গ গ পগ পগ পগা পগৌ গ gh ঘ ঘ ঘা পঘ ঘী ঘ ঘ ঘ পঘ পঘ পঘা পঘৌ ঘ nsup1 ঙ ঙ ঙা পঙ ঙী ঙ ঙ ঙ পঙ পঙ পঙা পঙৌ ঙ c চ চ চা পচ চী চ চ চ পচ পচ পচা পচৌ চ ch ছ ছ ছা পছ পছ ছ ছ ছ পছ পছ পছা পছৌ ছ j জ জ জা পজ জী জ জ জ পজ পজ পজা পজৌ জ jh ঝ ঝ ঝা পঝ ঝী ঝ ঝ ঝ পঝ পঝ পঝা পঝৌ ঝ nsup2 ঞ ঞ ঞা পঞ ঞী ঞ ঞ ঞ পঞ পঞ পঞা পঞৌ ঞ t ট ট টা টি টী ট ট ট পট পট পটা পটৌ ট th ঠ ঠ ঠা ঠি ঠী ঠ ঠ ঠ পঠ পঠ পঠা পঠৌ ঠ d ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড dh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ r ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড rh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ n ণ ণ ণা পণ ণী ণ ণ ণ পণ পণ পণা পণৌ ণ t ত=ৎ ত তা পত তী ত ত ত পত পত পতা পতৌ ত th থ থ থা পথ থী থ থ থ পথ পথ পথা পথৌ থ d দ দ দা পদ দী দ দ দ পদ পদ পদা পদৌ দ dh ধ ধ ধা পধ ধী ধ ধ ধ পধ পধ পধা পধৌ ধ n ন ন না পন নী ন ন ন পন পন পনা পনৌ ন p প প পা পপ পী প প প পপ পপ পপা পপৌ প ph ফ ফ ফা পফ ফী ফ ফ ফ পফ পফ পফা পফৌ ফ b ব ব বা পব বী ব ব ব পব পব পবা পবৌ ব bh ভ ভ ভা পভ ভী ভ ভ ভ পভ পভ পভা পভৌ ভ m ম ম মা পম মী ম ম ম পম পম পমা পমৌ ম y য য যা পয যী য য য পয পয পযা পযৌ য y য় য় য়া পয় য়ী য় য় য় পয় পয় পয়া পয়ৌ য় r র র রা পর রী র র পর পর পরা পরৌ র l ল ল লা পল লী ল ল ল পল পল পলা পলৌ ল sh শ শ শা পশ শী শ শ শ পশ পশ পশা পশৌ শ s ষ ষ ষা পষ ষী ষ ষ ষ পষ পষ পষা পষৌ ষ s স স সা পস সী স স স পস পস পসা পসৌ স h হ হ হা পহ হী হ হ হ পহ পহ পহা পহৌ হ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 3 21 March 2014
CONTENTS
Page Subject
4 Introduction
4 Styles
4 Scripts
4 Pronunciation Hints
5 The Bengali Alphabet
5 Sound Chart
6 Pronunciation of Vowels
7 Pronunciation of Consonants
9 Writing of Syllables
9 Leading Vowel Forms
10 Trailing Vowel Forms
12 Hints on Special Pronunciation
13 Declension of Singular Pronouns
14 Declension of Plural Pronouns
15 Notes on Declension of Pronouns and Nouns
17 Verbs like ldquokaraardquo ldquoকরাrdquo [Grammar 533]
19 Verbs like ldquokhaaoyaardquo ldquoকরাrdquo [Grammar 534]
21 Verbs like ldquokaraardquo ldquoকরাrdquo [Grammar 535]
24 Verb families declined for ldquotuirdquo ldquoতইrdquo and ldquotoraardquo ldquoততারাrdquo
25 Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
26 Fractions
27 Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [Grammar 573]
28 Approximation [Grammar 574]
29 Months and Seasons
30 Dates
31 Times and Seasons
33-
63
Study Review Questions and Answers
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 4 21 March 2014
INTRODUCTION
Bengali Styles The common or ldquoChalitordquo style of Bengali is given first
( ) Where the Bengali word in literary or classical (ldquoSadhu Bhaasaardquo)
style is different from the chalito form this is given after it in round
brackets
Two Bengali Scripts - Bengali Script and Romanized
Bengali meanings are given both in Bengali script and in a Romanized
form
Romanized Form This helps beginners to use the language until they have mastered the
script The romanized form differs from systems used by other writers
but has the advantage of providing a consistent system of phonetic
conversion from Bengali script that represents each Bengali character
element precisely and uniquely Its appearance reflects the
pronunciation closelymdashafter accepting a few simple transcription
rules
Pronunciation Hints [ ] Hints are sometimes given in square brackets where words have ceased
being pronounced truly phoneticallymdashmainly in cases where two
consonants are joined into ldquoconjunctsrdquo and the initial consonant is
emphasized while the trailing consonant is effectively lost See
sections below on ldquoBengali Alphabetrdquo and ldquoHints on Special
Pronunciationrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 5 21 March 2014
THE BENGALI ALPHABET
CLASSIFICATION OF BENGALI SOUNDS
C O N S O N A N T S V O W E L S
Family Hard Soft Soft Soft Hard
Held
Huffed
Held
Huffed
Nasals Semi-
vowels
Spirants Short Long Diphthongs
Guttural ka | kha ga | gha nsup1a ha hha a aa e | ei ee oy
ক খ গ ঘ ঙ হ ঃ অ আ এ ঐ Palatal ca | cha ja | jha nsup2a ya sha i ii
চ ছ জ ঝ ঞ য় শ ই ঈ Cerebral ta | tha da | dha na Ra sa rri
ট ঠ ড ঢ ণ র ষ ঋ ra | rha ya
ড ঢ য Dental ta | tha da | dha na La sa
ত থ দধ ন ল স Labial pa | pha ba | bha ma ba hha u uu o | oo au
প ফ ব ভ ম ব ঃ উ ঊ ও ঔ Others ndeg n^
ঃ ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 6 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS
VOWELS
INDEPENDENT OR INITIAL VOWELS SHAPE BEHIND A
CONSONANT (SUCH
AS ldquoপrdquo ldquopardquo)
Character Roman Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in
the
English
word
(no
vowel)
(no
sound) প p (ldquop rdquo)
অ a
short ldquoardquo
short ldquoordquo
(inherent
a)
ldquowanderrdquo
ldquooffrdquo
প pa
আ aa long ldquoardquo ldquofarrdquo পা paa
অযা a flat ldquoardquo ldquoapplerdquo পযা pa pyaa
ই i short ldquoirdquo ldquofillrdquo পপ pi
ঈ ii long ldquoirdquo ldquofeelrdquo পী pii
উ u short ldquourdquo ldquopullrdquo প pu
ঊ uu long ldquooordquo ldquopoolrdquo প puu
ঋ rri short ldquorirdquo ldquotriplerdquo প prri
এ e short ldquoerdquo ldquoeggrdquo পপ pe
ঐ ee long ldquooirdquo ldquoboilrdquo পপ pee (ldquopoirdquo)
ও o short ldquoordquo ldquoonrdquo পপা po
ঔ oo long ldquoordquo ldquoownerrdquo
ldquonowrdquo পপৌ poo
(ldquopaupowrdquo)
ঃ nordm nasal ldquongrdquo ldquosingerrdquo প pandeg
(ldquopangrdquo)
ঃ hh abrupt ldquohrdquo ldquoJudahrdquo প pahh
ঃ ^ nasal
faintly as
in French
ldquononrdquo
প p^a (ldquopanrdquo)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 7 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS
CONSONANTS
Group Char-
acter Roman
Form
Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in the
English word
Guttural ক k ldquokrdquo in ldquokeenrdquo
- in the
throat খ kh ldquokhrdquo in ldquorockheadrdquo
গ g ldquogrdquo in ldquogetrdquo
ঘ gh ldquoghrdquo in ldquoslagheaprdquo
ঙ nsup1 ldquonrdquo in ldquodonkeyrdquo
Palatal চ c ldquochrdquo in ldquochairrdquo
- on the
palate ছ ch chhrdquo in
ldquomatchheadrdquo
জ j ldquojrdquo in ldquoenjoyrdquo
ঝ jh ldquodgehrdquo in ldquohedgehogrdquo
ঞ nsup2 ldquonrdquo in ldquopinchrdquo
Cerebral ট t ldquotrdquo in ldquoalterrdquo
- on the
roof ঠ th ldquothrdquo in
ldquomalthouserdquo
of the
mouth ড d ldquodrdquo in ldquoDadrdquo
ড r ldquorrrdquo in ldquobarredrdquo
ঢ dh ldquodhrdquo in
ldquogoldhammerrdquo
ঢ rh ldquorrhrdquo in ldquomyrrh
lumprdquo
ণ n ldquonrdquo in ldquoinlaidrdquo
Dental ত (ৎ) t ldquotrdquo in ldquoantrdquo
- on the
teeth থ th ldquothrdquo in ldquowarthogrdquo
দ d ldquodrdquo in ldquobedsrdquo
ধ dh ldquodhrdquo in ldquoredheadsrdquo
ন n ldquonrdquo in ldquobendingrdquo
Labial প p ldquoprdquo in ldquopeacerdquo
- on the
lips ফ ph ldquophrdquo in ldquoupholdrdquo
ব bvw ldquobrdquo in
ldquobobrdquo(ldquoswim
twinrdquo)
ভ bh ldquobhrdquo in ldquonibholderrdquo
ম m ldquomrdquo in ldquomeetrdquo
য y ldquojrdquo in ldquojogrdquo
Forward য় y ldquoyrdquo in ldquoyesrdquo
semi-
vowels র r ldquorrdquo in ldquorightrdquo
ল l ldquolrdquo in ldquoloverdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 8 21 March 2014
Sibillants শ sh ldquoshrdquo in ldquoshiprdquo
ষ s ldquoshrdquo in ldquowashtubrdquo
স s ldquoshrdquo in ldquoensurerdquo
Guttural
semi-
vowel
হ h ldquohrdquo in ldquoheartrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 9 21 March 2014
WRITING OF SYLLABLES
Vowel Leading Form Independent or as Initial Followed by a Non-Vowel
LEADING VOWEL FORMS
+ndeg +hha +^ +p` +pa
etc
+rpa
etc
a+ অ অ অ অপ অপ অপপ
aa+ আ আ আ আপ আপ আপপ
a+ অযা অযা অযা অযাপ অযাপ অযাপপ
i+ ই ই ই ইপ ইপ ইপপ
ii+ ঈ ঈ ঈ ঈপ ঈপ ঈপপ
u+ উ উ উ উপ উপ উপপ
uu+ ঊ ঊ ঊ ঊপ ঊপ ঊপপ
rri+ ঋ ঋ ঋ ঋপ ঋপ ঋপপ
e+ এ এ এ এপ এপ এপপ
ee+ ঐ ঐ ঐ ঐপ ঐপ ঐপপ
o+ ও ও ও ওপ ওপ ওপপ
oo+ ঔ ঔ ঔ ঔপ ঔপ ঔপপ
ndeg+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
hh+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
^+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 10 21 March 2014
Vowel Trailing (Also referred to as ldquoVowel Form Following a Consonantrdquo)
TRAILING VOWEL FORMS
+
`
+
a
+
aa
+
i
+
ii
+
u
+
u
+
rri
+
e
+
ee
+
o
+
oo
+
ndeg k ক ক কা পক কী ক ক ক পক পক পকা পকৌ ক kh খ খ খা পখ খী খ খ খ পখ পখ পখা পখৌ খ g গ গ গা পগ গী গ গ গ পগ পগ পগা পগৌ গ gh ঘ ঘ ঘা পঘ ঘী ঘ ঘ ঘ পঘ পঘ পঘা পঘৌ ঘ nsup1 ঙ ঙ ঙা পঙ ঙী ঙ ঙ ঙ পঙ পঙ পঙা পঙৌ ঙ c চ চ চা পচ চী চ চ চ পচ পচ পচা পচৌ চ ch ছ ছ ছা পছ পছ ছ ছ ছ পছ পছ পছা পছৌ ছ j জ জ জা পজ জী জ জ জ পজ পজ পজা পজৌ জ jh ঝ ঝ ঝা পঝ ঝী ঝ ঝ ঝ পঝ পঝ পঝা পঝৌ ঝ nsup2 ঞ ঞ ঞা পঞ ঞী ঞ ঞ ঞ পঞ পঞ পঞা পঞৌ ঞ t ট ট টা টি টী ট ট ট পট পট পটা পটৌ ট th ঠ ঠ ঠা ঠি ঠী ঠ ঠ ঠ পঠ পঠ পঠা পঠৌ ঠ d ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড dh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ r ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড rh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ n ণ ণ ণা পণ ণী ণ ণ ণ পণ পণ পণা পণৌ ণ t ত=ৎ ত তা পত তী ত ত ত পত পত পতা পতৌ ত th থ থ থা পথ থী থ থ থ পথ পথ পথা পথৌ থ d দ দ দা পদ দী দ দ দ পদ পদ পদা পদৌ দ dh ধ ধ ধা পধ ধী ধ ধ ধ পধ পধ পধা পধৌ ধ n ন ন না পন নী ন ন ন পন পন পনা পনৌ ন p প প পা পপ পী প প প পপ পপ পপা পপৌ প ph ফ ফ ফা পফ ফী ফ ফ ফ পফ পফ পফা পফৌ ফ b ব ব বা পব বী ব ব ব পব পব পবা পবৌ ব bh ভ ভ ভা পভ ভী ভ ভ ভ পভ পভ পভা পভৌ ভ m ম ম মা পম মী ম ম ম পম পম পমা পমৌ ম y য য যা পয যী য য য পয পয পযা পযৌ য y য় য় য়া পয় য়ী য় য় য় পয় পয় পয়া পয়ৌ য় r র র রা পর রী র র পর পর পরা পরৌ র l ল ল লা পল লী ল ল ল পল পল পলা পলৌ ল sh শ শ শা পশ শী শ শ শ পশ পশ পশা পশৌ শ s ষ ষ ষা পষ ষী ষ ষ ষ পষ পষ পষা পষৌ ষ s স স সা পস সী স স স পস পস পসা পসৌ স h হ হ হা পহ হী হ হ হ পহ পহ পহা পহৌ হ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 4 21 March 2014
INTRODUCTION
Bengali Styles The common or ldquoChalitordquo style of Bengali is given first
( ) Where the Bengali word in literary or classical (ldquoSadhu Bhaasaardquo)
style is different from the chalito form this is given after it in round
brackets
Two Bengali Scripts - Bengali Script and Romanized
Bengali meanings are given both in Bengali script and in a Romanized
form
Romanized Form This helps beginners to use the language until they have mastered the
script The romanized form differs from systems used by other writers
but has the advantage of providing a consistent system of phonetic
conversion from Bengali script that represents each Bengali character
element precisely and uniquely Its appearance reflects the
pronunciation closelymdashafter accepting a few simple transcription
rules
Pronunciation Hints [ ] Hints are sometimes given in square brackets where words have ceased
being pronounced truly phoneticallymdashmainly in cases where two
consonants are joined into ldquoconjunctsrdquo and the initial consonant is
emphasized while the trailing consonant is effectively lost See
sections below on ldquoBengali Alphabetrdquo and ldquoHints on Special
Pronunciationrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 5 21 March 2014
THE BENGALI ALPHABET
CLASSIFICATION OF BENGALI SOUNDS
C O N S O N A N T S V O W E L S
Family Hard Soft Soft Soft Hard
Held
Huffed
Held
Huffed
Nasals Semi-
vowels
Spirants Short Long Diphthongs
Guttural ka | kha ga | gha nsup1a ha hha a aa e | ei ee oy
ক খ গ ঘ ঙ হ ঃ অ আ এ ঐ Palatal ca | cha ja | jha nsup2a ya sha i ii
চ ছ জ ঝ ঞ য় শ ই ঈ Cerebral ta | tha da | dha na Ra sa rri
ট ঠ ড ঢ ণ র ষ ঋ ra | rha ya
ড ঢ য Dental ta | tha da | dha na La sa
ত থ দধ ন ল স Labial pa | pha ba | bha ma ba hha u uu o | oo au
প ফ ব ভ ম ব ঃ উ ঊ ও ঔ Others ndeg n^
ঃ ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 6 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS
VOWELS
INDEPENDENT OR INITIAL VOWELS SHAPE BEHIND A
CONSONANT (SUCH
AS ldquoপrdquo ldquopardquo)
Character Roman Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in
the
English
word
(no
vowel)
(no
sound) প p (ldquop rdquo)
অ a
short ldquoardquo
short ldquoordquo
(inherent
a)
ldquowanderrdquo
ldquooffrdquo
প pa
আ aa long ldquoardquo ldquofarrdquo পা paa
অযা a flat ldquoardquo ldquoapplerdquo পযা pa pyaa
ই i short ldquoirdquo ldquofillrdquo পপ pi
ঈ ii long ldquoirdquo ldquofeelrdquo পী pii
উ u short ldquourdquo ldquopullrdquo প pu
ঊ uu long ldquooordquo ldquopoolrdquo প puu
ঋ rri short ldquorirdquo ldquotriplerdquo প prri
এ e short ldquoerdquo ldquoeggrdquo পপ pe
ঐ ee long ldquooirdquo ldquoboilrdquo পপ pee (ldquopoirdquo)
ও o short ldquoordquo ldquoonrdquo পপা po
ঔ oo long ldquoordquo ldquoownerrdquo
ldquonowrdquo পপৌ poo
(ldquopaupowrdquo)
ঃ nordm nasal ldquongrdquo ldquosingerrdquo প pandeg
(ldquopangrdquo)
ঃ hh abrupt ldquohrdquo ldquoJudahrdquo প pahh
ঃ ^ nasal
faintly as
in French
ldquononrdquo
প p^a (ldquopanrdquo)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 7 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS
CONSONANTS
Group Char-
acter Roman
Form
Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in the
English word
Guttural ক k ldquokrdquo in ldquokeenrdquo
- in the
throat খ kh ldquokhrdquo in ldquorockheadrdquo
গ g ldquogrdquo in ldquogetrdquo
ঘ gh ldquoghrdquo in ldquoslagheaprdquo
ঙ nsup1 ldquonrdquo in ldquodonkeyrdquo
Palatal চ c ldquochrdquo in ldquochairrdquo
- on the
palate ছ ch chhrdquo in
ldquomatchheadrdquo
জ j ldquojrdquo in ldquoenjoyrdquo
ঝ jh ldquodgehrdquo in ldquohedgehogrdquo
ঞ nsup2 ldquonrdquo in ldquopinchrdquo
Cerebral ট t ldquotrdquo in ldquoalterrdquo
- on the
roof ঠ th ldquothrdquo in
ldquomalthouserdquo
of the
mouth ড d ldquodrdquo in ldquoDadrdquo
ড r ldquorrrdquo in ldquobarredrdquo
ঢ dh ldquodhrdquo in
ldquogoldhammerrdquo
ঢ rh ldquorrhrdquo in ldquomyrrh
lumprdquo
ণ n ldquonrdquo in ldquoinlaidrdquo
Dental ত (ৎ) t ldquotrdquo in ldquoantrdquo
- on the
teeth থ th ldquothrdquo in ldquowarthogrdquo
দ d ldquodrdquo in ldquobedsrdquo
ধ dh ldquodhrdquo in ldquoredheadsrdquo
ন n ldquonrdquo in ldquobendingrdquo
Labial প p ldquoprdquo in ldquopeacerdquo
- on the
lips ফ ph ldquophrdquo in ldquoupholdrdquo
ব bvw ldquobrdquo in
ldquobobrdquo(ldquoswim
twinrdquo)
ভ bh ldquobhrdquo in ldquonibholderrdquo
ম m ldquomrdquo in ldquomeetrdquo
য y ldquojrdquo in ldquojogrdquo
Forward য় y ldquoyrdquo in ldquoyesrdquo
semi-
vowels র r ldquorrdquo in ldquorightrdquo
ল l ldquolrdquo in ldquoloverdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 8 21 March 2014
Sibillants শ sh ldquoshrdquo in ldquoshiprdquo
ষ s ldquoshrdquo in ldquowashtubrdquo
স s ldquoshrdquo in ldquoensurerdquo
Guttural
semi-
vowel
হ h ldquohrdquo in ldquoheartrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 9 21 March 2014
WRITING OF SYLLABLES
Vowel Leading Form Independent or as Initial Followed by a Non-Vowel
LEADING VOWEL FORMS
+ndeg +hha +^ +p` +pa
etc
+rpa
etc
a+ অ অ অ অপ অপ অপপ
aa+ আ আ আ আপ আপ আপপ
a+ অযা অযা অযা অযাপ অযাপ অযাপপ
i+ ই ই ই ইপ ইপ ইপপ
ii+ ঈ ঈ ঈ ঈপ ঈপ ঈপপ
u+ উ উ উ উপ উপ উপপ
uu+ ঊ ঊ ঊ ঊপ ঊপ ঊপপ
rri+ ঋ ঋ ঋ ঋপ ঋপ ঋপপ
e+ এ এ এ এপ এপ এপপ
ee+ ঐ ঐ ঐ ঐপ ঐপ ঐপপ
o+ ও ও ও ওপ ওপ ওপপ
oo+ ঔ ঔ ঔ ঔপ ঔপ ঔপপ
ndeg+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
hh+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
^+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 10 21 March 2014
Vowel Trailing (Also referred to as ldquoVowel Form Following a Consonantrdquo)
TRAILING VOWEL FORMS
+
`
+
a
+
aa
+
i
+
ii
+
u
+
u
+
rri
+
e
+
ee
+
o
+
oo
+
ndeg k ক ক কা পক কী ক ক ক পক পক পকা পকৌ ক kh খ খ খা পখ খী খ খ খ পখ পখ পখা পখৌ খ g গ গ গা পগ গী গ গ গ পগ পগ পগা পগৌ গ gh ঘ ঘ ঘা পঘ ঘী ঘ ঘ ঘ পঘ পঘ পঘা পঘৌ ঘ nsup1 ঙ ঙ ঙা পঙ ঙী ঙ ঙ ঙ পঙ পঙ পঙা পঙৌ ঙ c চ চ চা পচ চী চ চ চ পচ পচ পচা পচৌ চ ch ছ ছ ছা পছ পছ ছ ছ ছ পছ পছ পছা পছৌ ছ j জ জ জা পজ জী জ জ জ পজ পজ পজা পজৌ জ jh ঝ ঝ ঝা পঝ ঝী ঝ ঝ ঝ পঝ পঝ পঝা পঝৌ ঝ nsup2 ঞ ঞ ঞা পঞ ঞী ঞ ঞ ঞ পঞ পঞ পঞা পঞৌ ঞ t ট ট টা টি টী ট ট ট পট পট পটা পটৌ ট th ঠ ঠ ঠা ঠি ঠী ঠ ঠ ঠ পঠ পঠ পঠা পঠৌ ঠ d ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড dh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ r ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড rh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ n ণ ণ ণা পণ ণী ণ ণ ণ পণ পণ পণা পণৌ ণ t ত=ৎ ত তা পত তী ত ত ত পত পত পতা পতৌ ত th থ থ থা পথ থী থ থ থ পথ পথ পথা পথৌ থ d দ দ দা পদ দী দ দ দ পদ পদ পদা পদৌ দ dh ধ ধ ধা পধ ধী ধ ধ ধ পধ পধ পধা পধৌ ধ n ন ন না পন নী ন ন ন পন পন পনা পনৌ ন p প প পা পপ পী প প প পপ পপ পপা পপৌ প ph ফ ফ ফা পফ ফী ফ ফ ফ পফ পফ পফা পফৌ ফ b ব ব বা পব বী ব ব ব পব পব পবা পবৌ ব bh ভ ভ ভা পভ ভী ভ ভ ভ পভ পভ পভা পভৌ ভ m ম ম মা পম মী ম ম ম পম পম পমা পমৌ ম y য য যা পয যী য য য পয পয পযা পযৌ য y য় য় য়া পয় য়ী য় য় য় পয় পয় পয়া পয়ৌ য় r র র রা পর রী র র পর পর পরা পরৌ র l ল ল লা পল লী ল ল ল পল পল পলা পলৌ ল sh শ শ শা পশ শী শ শ শ পশ পশ পশা পশৌ শ s ষ ষ ষা পষ ষী ষ ষ ষ পষ পষ পষা পষৌ ষ s স স সা পস সী স স স পস পস পসা পসৌ স h হ হ হা পহ হী হ হ হ পহ পহ পহা পহৌ হ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 5 21 March 2014
THE BENGALI ALPHABET
CLASSIFICATION OF BENGALI SOUNDS
C O N S O N A N T S V O W E L S
Family Hard Soft Soft Soft Hard
Held
Huffed
Held
Huffed
Nasals Semi-
vowels
Spirants Short Long Diphthongs
Guttural ka | kha ga | gha nsup1a ha hha a aa e | ei ee oy
ক খ গ ঘ ঙ হ ঃ অ আ এ ঐ Palatal ca | cha ja | jha nsup2a ya sha i ii
চ ছ জ ঝ ঞ য় শ ই ঈ Cerebral ta | tha da | dha na Ra sa rri
ট ঠ ড ঢ ণ র ষ ঋ ra | rha ya
ড ঢ য Dental ta | tha da | dha na La sa
ত থ দধ ন ল স Labial pa | pha ba | bha ma ba hha u uu o | oo au
প ফ ব ভ ম ব ঃ উ ঊ ও ঔ Others ndeg n^
ঃ ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 6 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS
VOWELS
INDEPENDENT OR INITIAL VOWELS SHAPE BEHIND A
CONSONANT (SUCH
AS ldquoপrdquo ldquopardquo)
Character Roman Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in
the
English
word
(no
vowel)
(no
sound) প p (ldquop rdquo)
অ a
short ldquoardquo
short ldquoordquo
(inherent
a)
ldquowanderrdquo
ldquooffrdquo
প pa
আ aa long ldquoardquo ldquofarrdquo পা paa
অযা a flat ldquoardquo ldquoapplerdquo পযা pa pyaa
ই i short ldquoirdquo ldquofillrdquo পপ pi
ঈ ii long ldquoirdquo ldquofeelrdquo পী pii
উ u short ldquourdquo ldquopullrdquo প pu
ঊ uu long ldquooordquo ldquopoolrdquo প puu
ঋ rri short ldquorirdquo ldquotriplerdquo প prri
এ e short ldquoerdquo ldquoeggrdquo পপ pe
ঐ ee long ldquooirdquo ldquoboilrdquo পপ pee (ldquopoirdquo)
ও o short ldquoordquo ldquoonrdquo পপা po
ঔ oo long ldquoordquo ldquoownerrdquo
ldquonowrdquo পপৌ poo
(ldquopaupowrdquo)
ঃ nordm nasal ldquongrdquo ldquosingerrdquo প pandeg
(ldquopangrdquo)
ঃ hh abrupt ldquohrdquo ldquoJudahrdquo প pahh
ঃ ^ nasal
faintly as
in French
ldquononrdquo
প p^a (ldquopanrdquo)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 7 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS
CONSONANTS
Group Char-
acter Roman
Form
Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in the
English word
Guttural ক k ldquokrdquo in ldquokeenrdquo
- in the
throat খ kh ldquokhrdquo in ldquorockheadrdquo
গ g ldquogrdquo in ldquogetrdquo
ঘ gh ldquoghrdquo in ldquoslagheaprdquo
ঙ nsup1 ldquonrdquo in ldquodonkeyrdquo
Palatal চ c ldquochrdquo in ldquochairrdquo
- on the
palate ছ ch chhrdquo in
ldquomatchheadrdquo
জ j ldquojrdquo in ldquoenjoyrdquo
ঝ jh ldquodgehrdquo in ldquohedgehogrdquo
ঞ nsup2 ldquonrdquo in ldquopinchrdquo
Cerebral ট t ldquotrdquo in ldquoalterrdquo
- on the
roof ঠ th ldquothrdquo in
ldquomalthouserdquo
of the
mouth ড d ldquodrdquo in ldquoDadrdquo
ড r ldquorrrdquo in ldquobarredrdquo
ঢ dh ldquodhrdquo in
ldquogoldhammerrdquo
ঢ rh ldquorrhrdquo in ldquomyrrh
lumprdquo
ণ n ldquonrdquo in ldquoinlaidrdquo
Dental ত (ৎ) t ldquotrdquo in ldquoantrdquo
- on the
teeth থ th ldquothrdquo in ldquowarthogrdquo
দ d ldquodrdquo in ldquobedsrdquo
ধ dh ldquodhrdquo in ldquoredheadsrdquo
ন n ldquonrdquo in ldquobendingrdquo
Labial প p ldquoprdquo in ldquopeacerdquo
- on the
lips ফ ph ldquophrdquo in ldquoupholdrdquo
ব bvw ldquobrdquo in
ldquobobrdquo(ldquoswim
twinrdquo)
ভ bh ldquobhrdquo in ldquonibholderrdquo
ম m ldquomrdquo in ldquomeetrdquo
য y ldquojrdquo in ldquojogrdquo
Forward য় y ldquoyrdquo in ldquoyesrdquo
semi-
vowels র r ldquorrdquo in ldquorightrdquo
ল l ldquolrdquo in ldquoloverdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 8 21 March 2014
Sibillants শ sh ldquoshrdquo in ldquoshiprdquo
ষ s ldquoshrdquo in ldquowashtubrdquo
স s ldquoshrdquo in ldquoensurerdquo
Guttural
semi-
vowel
হ h ldquohrdquo in ldquoheartrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 9 21 March 2014
WRITING OF SYLLABLES
Vowel Leading Form Independent or as Initial Followed by a Non-Vowel
LEADING VOWEL FORMS
+ndeg +hha +^ +p` +pa
etc
+rpa
etc
a+ অ অ অ অপ অপ অপপ
aa+ আ আ আ আপ আপ আপপ
a+ অযা অযা অযা অযাপ অযাপ অযাপপ
i+ ই ই ই ইপ ইপ ইপপ
ii+ ঈ ঈ ঈ ঈপ ঈপ ঈপপ
u+ উ উ উ উপ উপ উপপ
uu+ ঊ ঊ ঊ ঊপ ঊপ ঊপপ
rri+ ঋ ঋ ঋ ঋপ ঋপ ঋপপ
e+ এ এ এ এপ এপ এপপ
ee+ ঐ ঐ ঐ ঐপ ঐপ ঐপপ
o+ ও ও ও ওপ ওপ ওপপ
oo+ ঔ ঔ ঔ ঔপ ঔপ ঔপপ
ndeg+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
hh+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
^+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 10 21 March 2014
Vowel Trailing (Also referred to as ldquoVowel Form Following a Consonantrdquo)
TRAILING VOWEL FORMS
+
`
+
a
+
aa
+
i
+
ii
+
u
+
u
+
rri
+
e
+
ee
+
o
+
oo
+
ndeg k ক ক কা পক কী ক ক ক পক পক পকা পকৌ ক kh খ খ খা পখ খী খ খ খ পখ পখ পখা পখৌ খ g গ গ গা পগ গী গ গ গ পগ পগ পগা পগৌ গ gh ঘ ঘ ঘা পঘ ঘী ঘ ঘ ঘ পঘ পঘ পঘা পঘৌ ঘ nsup1 ঙ ঙ ঙা পঙ ঙী ঙ ঙ ঙ পঙ পঙ পঙা পঙৌ ঙ c চ চ চা পচ চী চ চ চ পচ পচ পচা পচৌ চ ch ছ ছ ছা পছ পছ ছ ছ ছ পছ পছ পছা পছৌ ছ j জ জ জা পজ জী জ জ জ পজ পজ পজা পজৌ জ jh ঝ ঝ ঝা পঝ ঝী ঝ ঝ ঝ পঝ পঝ পঝা পঝৌ ঝ nsup2 ঞ ঞ ঞা পঞ ঞী ঞ ঞ ঞ পঞ পঞ পঞা পঞৌ ঞ t ট ট টা টি টী ট ট ট পট পট পটা পটৌ ট th ঠ ঠ ঠা ঠি ঠী ঠ ঠ ঠ পঠ পঠ পঠা পঠৌ ঠ d ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড dh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ r ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড rh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ n ণ ণ ণা পণ ণী ণ ণ ণ পণ পণ পণা পণৌ ণ t ত=ৎ ত তা পত তী ত ত ত পত পত পতা পতৌ ত th থ থ থা পথ থী থ থ থ পথ পথ পথা পথৌ থ d দ দ দা পদ দী দ দ দ পদ পদ পদা পদৌ দ dh ধ ধ ধা পধ ধী ধ ধ ধ পধ পধ পধা পধৌ ধ n ন ন না পন নী ন ন ন পন পন পনা পনৌ ন p প প পা পপ পী প প প পপ পপ পপা পপৌ প ph ফ ফ ফা পফ ফী ফ ফ ফ পফ পফ পফা পফৌ ফ b ব ব বা পব বী ব ব ব পব পব পবা পবৌ ব bh ভ ভ ভা পভ ভী ভ ভ ভ পভ পভ পভা পভৌ ভ m ম ম মা পম মী ম ম ম পম পম পমা পমৌ ম y য য যা পয যী য য য পয পয পযা পযৌ য y য় য় য়া পয় য়ী য় য় য় পয় পয় পয়া পয়ৌ য় r র র রা পর রী র র পর পর পরা পরৌ র l ল ল লা পল লী ল ল ল পল পল পলা পলৌ ল sh শ শ শা পশ শী শ শ শ পশ পশ পশা পশৌ শ s ষ ষ ষা পষ ষী ষ ষ ষ পষ পষ পষা পষৌ ষ s স স সা পস সী স স স পস পস পসা পসৌ স h হ হ হা পহ হী হ হ হ পহ পহ পহা পহৌ হ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 6 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS
VOWELS
INDEPENDENT OR INITIAL VOWELS SHAPE BEHIND A
CONSONANT (SUCH
AS ldquoপrdquo ldquopardquo)
Character Roman Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in
the
English
word
(no
vowel)
(no
sound) প p (ldquop rdquo)
অ a
short ldquoardquo
short ldquoordquo
(inherent
a)
ldquowanderrdquo
ldquooffrdquo
প pa
আ aa long ldquoardquo ldquofarrdquo পা paa
অযা a flat ldquoardquo ldquoapplerdquo পযা pa pyaa
ই i short ldquoirdquo ldquofillrdquo পপ pi
ঈ ii long ldquoirdquo ldquofeelrdquo পী pii
উ u short ldquourdquo ldquopullrdquo প pu
ঊ uu long ldquooordquo ldquopoolrdquo প puu
ঋ rri short ldquorirdquo ldquotriplerdquo প prri
এ e short ldquoerdquo ldquoeggrdquo পপ pe
ঐ ee long ldquooirdquo ldquoboilrdquo পপ pee (ldquopoirdquo)
ও o short ldquoordquo ldquoonrdquo পপা po
ঔ oo long ldquoordquo ldquoownerrdquo
ldquonowrdquo পপৌ poo
(ldquopaupowrdquo)
ঃ nordm nasal ldquongrdquo ldquosingerrdquo প pandeg
(ldquopangrdquo)
ঃ hh abrupt ldquohrdquo ldquoJudahrdquo প pahh
ঃ ^ nasal
faintly as
in French
ldquononrdquo
প p^a (ldquopanrdquo)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 7 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS
CONSONANTS
Group Char-
acter Roman
Form
Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in the
English word
Guttural ক k ldquokrdquo in ldquokeenrdquo
- in the
throat খ kh ldquokhrdquo in ldquorockheadrdquo
গ g ldquogrdquo in ldquogetrdquo
ঘ gh ldquoghrdquo in ldquoslagheaprdquo
ঙ nsup1 ldquonrdquo in ldquodonkeyrdquo
Palatal চ c ldquochrdquo in ldquochairrdquo
- on the
palate ছ ch chhrdquo in
ldquomatchheadrdquo
জ j ldquojrdquo in ldquoenjoyrdquo
ঝ jh ldquodgehrdquo in ldquohedgehogrdquo
ঞ nsup2 ldquonrdquo in ldquopinchrdquo
Cerebral ট t ldquotrdquo in ldquoalterrdquo
- on the
roof ঠ th ldquothrdquo in
ldquomalthouserdquo
of the
mouth ড d ldquodrdquo in ldquoDadrdquo
ড r ldquorrrdquo in ldquobarredrdquo
ঢ dh ldquodhrdquo in
ldquogoldhammerrdquo
ঢ rh ldquorrhrdquo in ldquomyrrh
lumprdquo
ণ n ldquonrdquo in ldquoinlaidrdquo
Dental ত (ৎ) t ldquotrdquo in ldquoantrdquo
- on the
teeth থ th ldquothrdquo in ldquowarthogrdquo
দ d ldquodrdquo in ldquobedsrdquo
ধ dh ldquodhrdquo in ldquoredheadsrdquo
ন n ldquonrdquo in ldquobendingrdquo
Labial প p ldquoprdquo in ldquopeacerdquo
- on the
lips ফ ph ldquophrdquo in ldquoupholdrdquo
ব bvw ldquobrdquo in
ldquobobrdquo(ldquoswim
twinrdquo)
ভ bh ldquobhrdquo in ldquonibholderrdquo
ম m ldquomrdquo in ldquomeetrdquo
য y ldquojrdquo in ldquojogrdquo
Forward য় y ldquoyrdquo in ldquoyesrdquo
semi-
vowels র r ldquorrdquo in ldquorightrdquo
ল l ldquolrdquo in ldquoloverdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 8 21 March 2014
Sibillants শ sh ldquoshrdquo in ldquoshiprdquo
ষ s ldquoshrdquo in ldquowashtubrdquo
স s ldquoshrdquo in ldquoensurerdquo
Guttural
semi-
vowel
হ h ldquohrdquo in ldquoheartrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 9 21 March 2014
WRITING OF SYLLABLES
Vowel Leading Form Independent or as Initial Followed by a Non-Vowel
LEADING VOWEL FORMS
+ndeg +hha +^ +p` +pa
etc
+rpa
etc
a+ অ অ অ অপ অপ অপপ
aa+ আ আ আ আপ আপ আপপ
a+ অযা অযা অযা অযাপ অযাপ অযাপপ
i+ ই ই ই ইপ ইপ ইপপ
ii+ ঈ ঈ ঈ ঈপ ঈপ ঈপপ
u+ উ উ উ উপ উপ উপপ
uu+ ঊ ঊ ঊ ঊপ ঊপ ঊপপ
rri+ ঋ ঋ ঋ ঋপ ঋপ ঋপপ
e+ এ এ এ এপ এপ এপপ
ee+ ঐ ঐ ঐ ঐপ ঐপ ঐপপ
o+ ও ও ও ওপ ওপ ওপপ
oo+ ঔ ঔ ঔ ঔপ ঔপ ঔপপ
ndeg+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
hh+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
^+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 10 21 March 2014
Vowel Trailing (Also referred to as ldquoVowel Form Following a Consonantrdquo)
TRAILING VOWEL FORMS
+
`
+
a
+
aa
+
i
+
ii
+
u
+
u
+
rri
+
e
+
ee
+
o
+
oo
+
ndeg k ক ক কা পক কী ক ক ক পক পক পকা পকৌ ক kh খ খ খা পখ খী খ খ খ পখ পখ পখা পখৌ খ g গ গ গা পগ গী গ গ গ পগ পগ পগা পগৌ গ gh ঘ ঘ ঘা পঘ ঘী ঘ ঘ ঘ পঘ পঘ পঘা পঘৌ ঘ nsup1 ঙ ঙ ঙা পঙ ঙী ঙ ঙ ঙ পঙ পঙ পঙা পঙৌ ঙ c চ চ চা পচ চী চ চ চ পচ পচ পচা পচৌ চ ch ছ ছ ছা পছ পছ ছ ছ ছ পছ পছ পছা পছৌ ছ j জ জ জা পজ জী জ জ জ পজ পজ পজা পজৌ জ jh ঝ ঝ ঝা পঝ ঝী ঝ ঝ ঝ পঝ পঝ পঝা পঝৌ ঝ nsup2 ঞ ঞ ঞা পঞ ঞী ঞ ঞ ঞ পঞ পঞ পঞা পঞৌ ঞ t ট ট টা টি টী ট ট ট পট পট পটা পটৌ ট th ঠ ঠ ঠা ঠি ঠী ঠ ঠ ঠ পঠ পঠ পঠা পঠৌ ঠ d ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড dh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ r ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড rh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ n ণ ণ ণা পণ ণী ণ ণ ণ পণ পণ পণা পণৌ ণ t ত=ৎ ত তা পত তী ত ত ত পত পত পতা পতৌ ত th থ থ থা পথ থী থ থ থ পথ পথ পথা পথৌ থ d দ দ দা পদ দী দ দ দ পদ পদ পদা পদৌ দ dh ধ ধ ধা পধ ধী ধ ধ ধ পধ পধ পধা পধৌ ধ n ন ন না পন নী ন ন ন পন পন পনা পনৌ ন p প প পা পপ পী প প প পপ পপ পপা পপৌ প ph ফ ফ ফা পফ ফী ফ ফ ফ পফ পফ পফা পফৌ ফ b ব ব বা পব বী ব ব ব পব পব পবা পবৌ ব bh ভ ভ ভা পভ ভী ভ ভ ভ পভ পভ পভা পভৌ ভ m ম ম মা পম মী ম ম ম পম পম পমা পমৌ ম y য য যা পয যী য য য পয পয পযা পযৌ য y য় য় য়া পয় য়ী য় য় য় পয় পয় পয়া পয়ৌ য় r র র রা পর রী র র পর পর পরা পরৌ র l ল ল লা পল লী ল ল ল পল পল পলা পলৌ ল sh শ শ শা পশ শী শ শ শ পশ পশ পশা পশৌ শ s ষ ষ ষা পষ ষী ষ ষ ষ পষ পষ পষা পষৌ ষ s স স সা পস সী স স স পস পস পসা পসৌ স h হ হ হা পহ হী হ হ হ পহ পহ পহা পহৌ হ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 7 21 March 2014
PRONUNCIATION OF CONSONANTS
CONSONANTS
Group Char-
acter Roman
Form
Sounds
like hellip
hellip as in the
English word
Guttural ক k ldquokrdquo in ldquokeenrdquo
- in the
throat খ kh ldquokhrdquo in ldquorockheadrdquo
গ g ldquogrdquo in ldquogetrdquo
ঘ gh ldquoghrdquo in ldquoslagheaprdquo
ঙ nsup1 ldquonrdquo in ldquodonkeyrdquo
Palatal চ c ldquochrdquo in ldquochairrdquo
- on the
palate ছ ch chhrdquo in
ldquomatchheadrdquo
জ j ldquojrdquo in ldquoenjoyrdquo
ঝ jh ldquodgehrdquo in ldquohedgehogrdquo
ঞ nsup2 ldquonrdquo in ldquopinchrdquo
Cerebral ট t ldquotrdquo in ldquoalterrdquo
- on the
roof ঠ th ldquothrdquo in
ldquomalthouserdquo
of the
mouth ড d ldquodrdquo in ldquoDadrdquo
ড r ldquorrrdquo in ldquobarredrdquo
ঢ dh ldquodhrdquo in
ldquogoldhammerrdquo
ঢ rh ldquorrhrdquo in ldquomyrrh
lumprdquo
ণ n ldquonrdquo in ldquoinlaidrdquo
Dental ত (ৎ) t ldquotrdquo in ldquoantrdquo
- on the
teeth থ th ldquothrdquo in ldquowarthogrdquo
দ d ldquodrdquo in ldquobedsrdquo
ধ dh ldquodhrdquo in ldquoredheadsrdquo
ন n ldquonrdquo in ldquobendingrdquo
Labial প p ldquoprdquo in ldquopeacerdquo
- on the
lips ফ ph ldquophrdquo in ldquoupholdrdquo
ব bvw ldquobrdquo in
ldquobobrdquo(ldquoswim
twinrdquo)
ভ bh ldquobhrdquo in ldquonibholderrdquo
ম m ldquomrdquo in ldquomeetrdquo
য y ldquojrdquo in ldquojogrdquo
Forward য় y ldquoyrdquo in ldquoyesrdquo
semi-
vowels র r ldquorrdquo in ldquorightrdquo
ল l ldquolrdquo in ldquoloverdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 8 21 March 2014
Sibillants শ sh ldquoshrdquo in ldquoshiprdquo
ষ s ldquoshrdquo in ldquowashtubrdquo
স s ldquoshrdquo in ldquoensurerdquo
Guttural
semi-
vowel
হ h ldquohrdquo in ldquoheartrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 9 21 March 2014
WRITING OF SYLLABLES
Vowel Leading Form Independent or as Initial Followed by a Non-Vowel
LEADING VOWEL FORMS
+ndeg +hha +^ +p` +pa
etc
+rpa
etc
a+ অ অ অ অপ অপ অপপ
aa+ আ আ আ আপ আপ আপপ
a+ অযা অযা অযা অযাপ অযাপ অযাপপ
i+ ই ই ই ইপ ইপ ইপপ
ii+ ঈ ঈ ঈ ঈপ ঈপ ঈপপ
u+ উ উ উ উপ উপ উপপ
uu+ ঊ ঊ ঊ ঊপ ঊপ ঊপপ
rri+ ঋ ঋ ঋ ঋপ ঋপ ঋপপ
e+ এ এ এ এপ এপ এপপ
ee+ ঐ ঐ ঐ ঐপ ঐপ ঐপপ
o+ ও ও ও ওপ ওপ ওপপ
oo+ ঔ ঔ ঔ ঔপ ঔপ ঔপপ
ndeg+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
hh+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
^+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 10 21 March 2014
Vowel Trailing (Also referred to as ldquoVowel Form Following a Consonantrdquo)
TRAILING VOWEL FORMS
+
`
+
a
+
aa
+
i
+
ii
+
u
+
u
+
rri
+
e
+
ee
+
o
+
oo
+
ndeg k ক ক কা পক কী ক ক ক পক পক পকা পকৌ ক kh খ খ খা পখ খী খ খ খ পখ পখ পখা পখৌ খ g গ গ গা পগ গী গ গ গ পগ পগ পগা পগৌ গ gh ঘ ঘ ঘা পঘ ঘী ঘ ঘ ঘ পঘ পঘ পঘা পঘৌ ঘ nsup1 ঙ ঙ ঙা পঙ ঙী ঙ ঙ ঙ পঙ পঙ পঙা পঙৌ ঙ c চ চ চা পচ চী চ চ চ পচ পচ পচা পচৌ চ ch ছ ছ ছা পছ পছ ছ ছ ছ পছ পছ পছা পছৌ ছ j জ জ জা পজ জী জ জ জ পজ পজ পজা পজৌ জ jh ঝ ঝ ঝা পঝ ঝী ঝ ঝ ঝ পঝ পঝ পঝা পঝৌ ঝ nsup2 ঞ ঞ ঞা পঞ ঞী ঞ ঞ ঞ পঞ পঞ পঞা পঞৌ ঞ t ট ট টা টি টী ট ট ট পট পট পটা পটৌ ট th ঠ ঠ ঠা ঠি ঠী ঠ ঠ ঠ পঠ পঠ পঠা পঠৌ ঠ d ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড dh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ r ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড rh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ n ণ ণ ণা পণ ণী ণ ণ ণ পণ পণ পণা পণৌ ণ t ত=ৎ ত তা পত তী ত ত ত পত পত পতা পতৌ ত th থ থ থা পথ থী থ থ থ পথ পথ পথা পথৌ থ d দ দ দা পদ দী দ দ দ পদ পদ পদা পদৌ দ dh ধ ধ ধা পধ ধী ধ ধ ধ পধ পধ পধা পধৌ ধ n ন ন না পন নী ন ন ন পন পন পনা পনৌ ন p প প পা পপ পী প প প পপ পপ পপা পপৌ প ph ফ ফ ফা পফ ফী ফ ফ ফ পফ পফ পফা পফৌ ফ b ব ব বা পব বী ব ব ব পব পব পবা পবৌ ব bh ভ ভ ভা পভ ভী ভ ভ ভ পভ পভ পভা পভৌ ভ m ম ম মা পম মী ম ম ম পম পম পমা পমৌ ম y য য যা পয যী য য য পয পয পযা পযৌ য y য় য় য়া পয় য়ী য় য় য় পয় পয় পয়া পয়ৌ য় r র র রা পর রী র র পর পর পরা পরৌ র l ল ল লা পল লী ল ল ল পল পল পলা পলৌ ল sh শ শ শা পশ শী শ শ শ পশ পশ পশা পশৌ শ s ষ ষ ষা পষ ষী ষ ষ ষ পষ পষ পষা পষৌ ষ s স স সা পস সী স স স পস পস পসা পসৌ স h হ হ হা পহ হী হ হ হ পহ পহ পহা পহৌ হ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 8 21 March 2014
Sibillants শ sh ldquoshrdquo in ldquoshiprdquo
ষ s ldquoshrdquo in ldquowashtubrdquo
স s ldquoshrdquo in ldquoensurerdquo
Guttural
semi-
vowel
হ h ldquohrdquo in ldquoheartrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 9 21 March 2014
WRITING OF SYLLABLES
Vowel Leading Form Independent or as Initial Followed by a Non-Vowel
LEADING VOWEL FORMS
+ndeg +hha +^ +p` +pa
etc
+rpa
etc
a+ অ অ অ অপ অপ অপপ
aa+ আ আ আ আপ আপ আপপ
a+ অযা অযা অযা অযাপ অযাপ অযাপপ
i+ ই ই ই ইপ ইপ ইপপ
ii+ ঈ ঈ ঈ ঈপ ঈপ ঈপপ
u+ উ উ উ উপ উপ উপপ
uu+ ঊ ঊ ঊ ঊপ ঊপ ঊপপ
rri+ ঋ ঋ ঋ ঋপ ঋপ ঋপপ
e+ এ এ এ এপ এপ এপপ
ee+ ঐ ঐ ঐ ঐপ ঐপ ঐপপ
o+ ও ও ও ওপ ওপ ওপপ
oo+ ঔ ঔ ঔ ঔপ ঔপ ঔপপ
ndeg+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
hh+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
^+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 10 21 March 2014
Vowel Trailing (Also referred to as ldquoVowel Form Following a Consonantrdquo)
TRAILING VOWEL FORMS
+
`
+
a
+
aa
+
i
+
ii
+
u
+
u
+
rri
+
e
+
ee
+
o
+
oo
+
ndeg k ক ক কা পক কী ক ক ক পক পক পকা পকৌ ক kh খ খ খা পখ খী খ খ খ পখ পখ পখা পখৌ খ g গ গ গা পগ গী গ গ গ পগ পগ পগা পগৌ গ gh ঘ ঘ ঘা পঘ ঘী ঘ ঘ ঘ পঘ পঘ পঘা পঘৌ ঘ nsup1 ঙ ঙ ঙা পঙ ঙী ঙ ঙ ঙ পঙ পঙ পঙা পঙৌ ঙ c চ চ চা পচ চী চ চ চ পচ পচ পচা পচৌ চ ch ছ ছ ছা পছ পছ ছ ছ ছ পছ পছ পছা পছৌ ছ j জ জ জা পজ জী জ জ জ পজ পজ পজা পজৌ জ jh ঝ ঝ ঝা পঝ ঝী ঝ ঝ ঝ পঝ পঝ পঝা পঝৌ ঝ nsup2 ঞ ঞ ঞা পঞ ঞী ঞ ঞ ঞ পঞ পঞ পঞা পঞৌ ঞ t ট ট টা টি টী ট ট ট পট পট পটা পটৌ ট th ঠ ঠ ঠা ঠি ঠী ঠ ঠ ঠ পঠ পঠ পঠা পঠৌ ঠ d ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড dh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ r ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড rh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ n ণ ণ ণা পণ ণী ণ ণ ণ পণ পণ পণা পণৌ ণ t ত=ৎ ত তা পত তী ত ত ত পত পত পতা পতৌ ত th থ থ থা পথ থী থ থ থ পথ পথ পথা পথৌ থ d দ দ দা পদ দী দ দ দ পদ পদ পদা পদৌ দ dh ধ ধ ধা পধ ধী ধ ধ ধ পধ পধ পধা পধৌ ধ n ন ন না পন নী ন ন ন পন পন পনা পনৌ ন p প প পা পপ পী প প প পপ পপ পপা পপৌ প ph ফ ফ ফা পফ ফী ফ ফ ফ পফ পফ পফা পফৌ ফ b ব ব বা পব বী ব ব ব পব পব পবা পবৌ ব bh ভ ভ ভা পভ ভী ভ ভ ভ পভ পভ পভা পভৌ ভ m ম ম মা পম মী ম ম ম পম পম পমা পমৌ ম y য য যা পয যী য য য পয পয পযা পযৌ য y য় য় য়া পয় য়ী য় য় য় পয় পয় পয়া পয়ৌ য় r র র রা পর রী র র পর পর পরা পরৌ র l ল ল লা পল লী ল ল ল পল পল পলা পলৌ ল sh শ শ শা পশ শী শ শ শ পশ পশ পশা পশৌ শ s ষ ষ ষা পষ ষী ষ ষ ষ পষ পষ পষা পষৌ ষ s স স সা পস সী স স স পস পস পসা পসৌ স h হ হ হা পহ হী হ হ হ পহ পহ পহা পহৌ হ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 9 21 March 2014
WRITING OF SYLLABLES
Vowel Leading Form Independent or as Initial Followed by a Non-Vowel
LEADING VOWEL FORMS
+ndeg +hha +^ +p` +pa
etc
+rpa
etc
a+ অ অ অ অপ অপ অপপ
aa+ আ আ আ আপ আপ আপপ
a+ অযা অযা অযা অযাপ অযাপ অযাপপ
i+ ই ই ই ইপ ইপ ইপপ
ii+ ঈ ঈ ঈ ঈপ ঈপ ঈপপ
u+ উ উ উ উপ উপ উপপ
uu+ ঊ ঊ ঊ ঊপ ঊপ ঊপপ
rri+ ঋ ঋ ঋ ঋপ ঋপ ঋপপ
e+ এ এ এ এপ এপ এপপ
ee+ ঐ ঐ ঐ ঐপ ঐপ ঐপপ
o+ ও ও ও ওপ ওপ ওপপ
oo+ ঔ ঔ ঔ ঔপ ঔপ ঔপপ
ndeg+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
hh+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
^+ - - - ঃ প ঃ প -
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 10 21 March 2014
Vowel Trailing (Also referred to as ldquoVowel Form Following a Consonantrdquo)
TRAILING VOWEL FORMS
+
`
+
a
+
aa
+
i
+
ii
+
u
+
u
+
rri
+
e
+
ee
+
o
+
oo
+
ndeg k ক ক কা পক কী ক ক ক পক পক পকা পকৌ ক kh খ খ খা পখ খী খ খ খ পখ পখ পখা পখৌ খ g গ গ গা পগ গী গ গ গ পগ পগ পগা পগৌ গ gh ঘ ঘ ঘা পঘ ঘী ঘ ঘ ঘ পঘ পঘ পঘা পঘৌ ঘ nsup1 ঙ ঙ ঙা পঙ ঙী ঙ ঙ ঙ পঙ পঙ পঙা পঙৌ ঙ c চ চ চা পচ চী চ চ চ পচ পচ পচা পচৌ চ ch ছ ছ ছা পছ পছ ছ ছ ছ পছ পছ পছা পছৌ ছ j জ জ জা পজ জী জ জ জ পজ পজ পজা পজৌ জ jh ঝ ঝ ঝা পঝ ঝী ঝ ঝ ঝ পঝ পঝ পঝা পঝৌ ঝ nsup2 ঞ ঞ ঞা পঞ ঞী ঞ ঞ ঞ পঞ পঞ পঞা পঞৌ ঞ t ট ট টা টি টী ট ট ট পট পট পটা পটৌ ট th ঠ ঠ ঠা ঠি ঠী ঠ ঠ ঠ পঠ পঠ পঠা পঠৌ ঠ d ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড dh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ r ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড rh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ n ণ ণ ণা পণ ণী ণ ণ ণ পণ পণ পণা পণৌ ণ t ত=ৎ ত তা পত তী ত ত ত পত পত পতা পতৌ ত th থ থ থা পথ থী থ থ থ পথ পথ পথা পথৌ থ d দ দ দা পদ দী দ দ দ পদ পদ পদা পদৌ দ dh ধ ধ ধা পধ ধী ধ ধ ধ পধ পধ পধা পধৌ ধ n ন ন না পন নী ন ন ন পন পন পনা পনৌ ন p প প পা পপ পী প প প পপ পপ পপা পপৌ প ph ফ ফ ফা পফ ফী ফ ফ ফ পফ পফ পফা পফৌ ফ b ব ব বা পব বী ব ব ব পব পব পবা পবৌ ব bh ভ ভ ভা পভ ভী ভ ভ ভ পভ পভ পভা পভৌ ভ m ম ম মা পম মী ম ম ম পম পম পমা পমৌ ম y য য যা পয যী য য য পয পয পযা পযৌ য y য় য় য়া পয় য়ী য় য় য় পয় পয় পয়া পয়ৌ য় r র র রা পর রী র র পর পর পরা পরৌ র l ল ল লা পল লী ল ল ল পল পল পলা পলৌ ল sh শ শ শা পশ শী শ শ শ পশ পশ পশা পশৌ শ s ষ ষ ষা পষ ষী ষ ষ ষ পষ পষ পষা পষৌ ষ s স স সা পস সী স স স পস পস পসা পসৌ স h হ হ হা পহ হী হ হ হ পহ পহ পহা পহৌ হ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 10 21 March 2014
Vowel Trailing (Also referred to as ldquoVowel Form Following a Consonantrdquo)
TRAILING VOWEL FORMS
+
`
+
a
+
aa
+
i
+
ii
+
u
+
u
+
rri
+
e
+
ee
+
o
+
oo
+
ndeg k ক ক কা পক কী ক ক ক পক পক পকা পকৌ ক kh খ খ খা পখ খী খ খ খ পখ পখ পখা পখৌ খ g গ গ গা পগ গী গ গ গ পগ পগ পগা পগৌ গ gh ঘ ঘ ঘা পঘ ঘী ঘ ঘ ঘ পঘ পঘ পঘা পঘৌ ঘ nsup1 ঙ ঙ ঙা পঙ ঙী ঙ ঙ ঙ পঙ পঙ পঙা পঙৌ ঙ c চ চ চা পচ চী চ চ চ পচ পচ পচা পচৌ চ ch ছ ছ ছা পছ পছ ছ ছ ছ পছ পছ পছা পছৌ ছ j জ জ জা পজ জী জ জ জ পজ পজ পজা পজৌ জ jh ঝ ঝ ঝা পঝ ঝী ঝ ঝ ঝ পঝ পঝ পঝা পঝৌ ঝ nsup2 ঞ ঞ ঞা পঞ ঞী ঞ ঞ ঞ পঞ পঞ পঞা পঞৌ ঞ t ট ট টা টি টী ট ট ট পট পট পটা পটৌ ট th ঠ ঠ ঠা ঠি ঠী ঠ ঠ ঠ পঠ পঠ পঠা পঠৌ ঠ d ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড dh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ r ড ড ডা পড ডী ড ড ড পড পড পডা পডৌ ড rh ঢ ঢ ঢা পঢ ঢী ঢ ঢ ঢ পঢ পঢ পঢা পঢৌ ঢ n ণ ণ ণা পণ ণী ণ ণ ণ পণ পণ পণা পণৌ ণ t ত=ৎ ত তা পত তী ত ত ত পত পত পতা পতৌ ত th থ থ থা পথ থী থ থ থ পথ পথ পথা পথৌ থ d দ দ দা পদ দী দ দ দ পদ পদ পদা পদৌ দ dh ধ ধ ধা পধ ধী ধ ধ ধ পধ পধ পধা পধৌ ধ n ন ন না পন নী ন ন ন পন পন পনা পনৌ ন p প প পা পপ পী প প প পপ পপ পপা পপৌ প ph ফ ফ ফা পফ ফী ফ ফ ফ পফ পফ পফা পফৌ ফ b ব ব বা পব বী ব ব ব পব পব পবা পবৌ ব bh ভ ভ ভা পভ ভী ভ ভ ভ পভ পভ পভা পভৌ ভ m ম ম মা পম মী ম ম ম পম পম পমা পমৌ ম y য য যা পয যী য য য পয পয পযা পযৌ য y য় য় য়া পয় য়ী য় য় য় পয় পয় পয়া পয়ৌ য় r র র রা পর রী র র পর পর পরা পরৌ র l ল ল লা পল লী ল ল ল পল পল পলা পলৌ ল sh শ শ শা পশ শী শ শ শ পশ পশ পশা পশৌ শ s ষ ষ ষা পষ ষী ষ ষ ষ পষ পষ পষা পষৌ ষ s স স সা পস সী স স স পস পস পসা পসৌ স h হ হ হা পহ হী হ হ হ পহ পহ পহা পহৌ হ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 11 21 March 2014
Similar use applies with ldquo+অযা +ঃ +ঃ rdquo forming কযা ক ক খযা খ খ and so on
Note the special forms- গ=গ+ঃ ৎ=ত+ঃ র=র+ঃ র=র+ঃ শ=শ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ হ=হ+ঃ
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 12 21 March 2014
HINTS ON SPECIAL PRONUNCIATION
Bengali script is no longer pronounced truly phonetically The pronunciation is often modified when certain
consonants are joined in ldquoconjunctsrdquo In these cases the first consonant is emphasized and the second is
effectively neglected The main instances are-
কষ = ক + ষ sounds like কক ক+ক
ksa = k + sa kka kka
তম = ত + ম sounds like তত ত+ত
tma = t + ma tta tta
Trailing য (ya) or য় (ya) are written as a ldquoyaflardquo which is a bit like ldquoSrdquo The effect on pronunciation is as
shown above for example-
দয = দ + য (য়) sounds like দদ দ+দ
dya = d + ya (ya) dda dda
The pronunciation of some conjuncts is changed more drastically-
জঞ = জ + ঞ sounds like গয গ+য়
jn2a = j + n2a gya gya
হয = হ + য (য়) sounds like জজ জ+জ
hya = h + ya (ya) jja jja
Where appropriate assistance is given in the dictionary after the romanized version of particularly
problematical words
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 13 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF SINGULAR PRONOUNS
(See Notes hellipbelow these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom I you you he she it you he she
Aasb yrsaquoS yrsaquosb Ecirc yAacute Aazsp sysp aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini
Acc me you you him her it you him her 5 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yAacute Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taa aapanaake t^aake
Gen my your your his her its your his her of me of you of you of him her of it of you of him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar
Dat me you you him her it you him her to me to you to you to him her to it to you to him her 6 Aabajplusmn Ecircyajplusmn Ecircyabajplusmn yajplusmn yajplusmn Aazpajplusmn yIumlajplusmn aamaake toke tomaake taake taake aapanaake t^aake
Instr1 by me by you by you by him her by it by you byhimher Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 7 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 8 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam 9 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her Aabajy Ecircyajy Ecircyabajy yajy yajy Aazpajy yIumlajy 10 Aabafrac12 Ecircyabafrac12 aamaate tote tomaate taate taate aapanaate t^aate aamaay tomaay
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 14 21 March 2014
DECLENSION OF PLURAL PRONOUNS
(See Notes below these two tables)
1 1 24 4 13 34 Nom we you you they they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyamAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute yamAacute AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute aami tui tumi se taa aapani tini aamaraa toraa tomaraa taaraa taaraa aapanaaraa t^aaraa
Acc us you you them them YOU them 11 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Gen our YOUR YOUR their their YOU THEIR
of us of YOU of YOU of them of them of YOU of them Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader
Dat us YOU YOU them them YOU THEM to us to YOU to YOU to them to them to YOU to THEM 12 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] [-jplusmn] aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke] [-ke]
Instr1 by me by YOU by YOU by them by them by YOU THEM Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 13 iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute iAtildeamAacute aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa dvaaraa
Instr2 via me via you via you via him her via it via you via him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 14 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 sijfrac12 aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader diye diye diye diye diye diye diye
Abl from from from from from from from me you you him her it you him her Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim 15 Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn Ecircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader theke theke theke theke theke theke theke
Loc in me in you in you in him her in it in you in him her 16 Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 15 21 March 2014
Notes on Declension of Pronouns (and Nouns)
1 The three forms of you listed from left to right are-
familiar common and honorific
2 For he or she there is no distinction for gender in the Bengali pronouns
The forms Ecirc se and yAacute- taa- are often replaced throughout by this one - either SatildeAacute- ihaa- or J- e-
3 Underlining of you he she YOU and they indicate the honorific form
4 The forms listed for -
yAacute- taa- and yIumlAacute- t^aa
are in modern Common Bengali (chalito language)
In classical (saadhu) literary style longer forms are used-
yaatildeAacute- taahaa- and yIumlaatildeAacute- t^aahaa-
5 Alternative forms are Aabafrac12 aamaay and Ecircyabafrac12 tomaay
6 See Note 5
When the sense involves respectful approach into someones presence the preferred form is- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 7 Instrumental 1 Case by the action of can also use plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn kartrrik sijfrac12 diye
or sifrac12Aacute diyaa
8 Instrumental 2 Case meaning by way of can also use sifrac12Aacute diyaa
9 Sometimes the possessive (Genetive Case) ending -m -r is omitted mdash AabAacute Ecircujplusmn aamaa theke etc
An alternative word for from is atildeSjy haite (atildejy hate)
10 See Note 5
For the sense of within me (inside of me) etc use- Aabam Ecircyam Ecircyabam yam yam Aazpam yIumlam bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm bjoordm aamaar tor tomaar taar taar aapanaar t^aar madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye madhye 11 The common forms are shortened to Aabajim aamaader etc similar to the Genetive Case
possessive form
The full literary form is Aabajimjplusmn aamaader-ke etc An alternative form of this is Aabasisup3jplusmn aamaadigake Ecircyasisup3jplusmn todigake Ecircyabasisup3jplusmn tomaadigake yaatildeasisup3jplusmn taahaadigake Aazpasisup3jplusmn aapanaadigake yIumlaatildeasisup3jplusmn t^aahaadigake
12 See Note 11
When the sense involves respectful approach into some persons presence it is clearer to use- Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot plusmnajmiddot aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache kaache 13 See Note 7
14 See Note 8 Also the group sense is emphasized by inserting bjoordm madhye mdash Aabajim bjoordm sijfrac12 aamaader madhye diye
15 When the sense involves respectful departure from a persons presence it is preferable to insert
plusmnamiddot kaach Aabajim Ecircyajim Ecircyabajim yajim yajim Aazpajim yIumlajim plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn plusmnamiddotEcircujplusmn aamaader toder tomaader taader taader aapanaader t^aader kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke kaach theke 16 Alternative (older) forms are Aabasisup3jy aamaadigate Ecircyasisup3jy todigate Ecircyabasisup3jy tomaadigate
yaatildeasisup3jy taahaadigate Aazpasisup3jy aapanaadigate yIumlaatildeasisup3jy t^aahaadigate
General Note About Nouns
The above declensions generally apply to nouns also except that-
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 16 21 March 2014
i) Personal nouns are made plural in the Nom Case by adding -JmAacute -eraa -mAacute -raa or -sup3t -gan
ii) Impersonal nouns in the plural in all cases take the ending -OacutejnotAacute -gulo (or -Oacutesnot -guli or -sup3t -gan)
Impersonal nouns take postposition words as listed under it and they above
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 17 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 533 Verb Family- Like ldquoplusmnmAacuterdquo karaa See Grammar 102
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
plusmnmAacute karaa
27
Infinitive Noun
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
27
Present Participle
plusmnmjy kar-te
(plusmnsmjy karite)
45
Past Participle
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
plusmnmjnot kar-le
(plusmnsmjnot karile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I do plusmnsm kari
(plusmnsm kari)
plusmnmplusmnjmAacute karakaro
(plusmnm kara)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Present Imperative
Let me dohellip
plusmnsm kari (plusmnsm kari)
plusmnm kara (plusmnmL karao)
plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk (plusmnmAEligplusmn karuk)
plusmnmAEligp karun (plusmnmAEligp karun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am doing
plusmnmsmiddot kar-chi
(plusmnsmjysmiddot
karitechi)
plusmnmmiddotplusmnmjmiddotAacute kar-chakar-cho
(plusmnsmjymiddot karitecha)
plusmnmjmiddot kar-che
(plusmnsmjyjmiddot
kariteche)
plusmnmjmiddotp kar-chen
(plusmnsmjyjmiddotp karitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have done plusmnjmsmiddot karechi
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddot
kariyaachi)
plusmnjmmiddotplusmnjmjmiddotAacute karechakarecho (plusmnsmfrac12amiddot
kariyaacha)
plusmnjmjmiddot kareche
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddot
kariyaache)
plusmnjmjmiddotp karechen
(plusmnsmfrac12ajmiddotp kariyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will do plusmnmcplusmnmjcAacute
kar-bakar-bo (plusmnsmc kariba)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjc kar-be
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmjcp kar-ben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) do
- - plusmnEcirccAacute karo
(plusmnsmL kario)
plusmnjm kare
(plusmnjm kare)
plusmnjmp karen
(plusmnjmp karen)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) do
plusmnmIcircc karba (plusmnsmcplusmnsmcL
karibakarba-o)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjc karbe
(plusmnsmjc karibe)
plusmnmIcircjcp karben (plusmnsmjcp
kariben) 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnc plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcAacute kar-te thaak-ba
kar-te thaak-bo (plusmnsmjy uasplusmnc karite thaakiba)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc
karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjc kar-te thaak-be
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjc karite thaakibe)
plusmnmjy uaplusmnjcp kar-te thaak-ben
(plusmnsmjy uasplusmnjcp karite thaakiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 18 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have done
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I did
plusmnmnotab kar-laam (plusmnsmnotab
karilaam)
plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)
plusmnmnotplusmnmjnotAacute kar-lakar-lo
(plusmnsmnot karila)
plusmnmjnotp kar-len (plusmnsmjnotp
karilen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had done I did
plusmnjmsmiddotnotab karechilaam
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnotab kariyaachilaam)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnot karechile
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnot kariyaachile)
plusmnjmsmiddotnot plusmnjmsmiddotjnotAacute
karechila
karechilo (plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotnot
kariyaachila)
plusmnjmsmiddotjnotp karechilen
(plusmnsmfrac12asmiddotjnotp kariyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should do
plusmnmyab kar-taam
(plusmnsmyab karitaam)
plusmnmjy kar-te (plusmnsmjy karite)
plusmnmyplusmnmjyAacute kar-takar-to
(plusmnsmy karita)
plusmnmjyp kar-ten (plusmnsmjyp
kariten)
504
Past Continuous
I was doing
plusmnmsmiddotnotab kar-chilaam
(plusmnsmjysmiddotnotab karitechilaam)
plusmnmsmiddotjnot kar-chile
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnot karitechile)
plusmnmsmiddotnot plusmnmsmiddotjnotAacute
kar-chila
kar-chilo (plusmnsmjysmiddotnot
karitechila)
plusmnmsmiddotjnotp kar-chilen
(plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp karitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been doing hellip hellip plusmnjm Aasmiddot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kare aas-chi
(hellip kariyaa aasitechi)
I go on doing hellip hellip plusmnjm parasnot (hellip plusmnsmfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kare cali
(hellip kariyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 19 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 534 Verb Family- Like ldquosup2aLfrac12Aacuterdquo khaaoyaa See Grammar 111
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
27
Infinitive Noun
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
27
Present Participle
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
(sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I eat
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Present Imperative
Let me eathellip
sup2aS khaai (sup2aS khaai)
sup2aL khaao
(sup2aL khaao)
sup2aplusmn khaay (sup2aFplusmnhellip khaauk)
sup2ap khaan (sup2aFp khaaun)
2829
Present
Continuous
I am eating
sup2asoacutemiddot khaacchi (sup2aSjysmiddot
khaaitechi)
sup2aoacutemiddotsup2ajoacutemiddotAacute khaaccha
khaaccho (sup2aSjymiddot
khaaitecha)
sup2ajoacutemiddot khaacche
(sup2aSjyjmiddot khaaiteche)
sup2ajoacutemiddotp khaacchen
(sup2aSjyjmiddotp khaaitechen)
462
Present Perfect
I have eaten Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot
kheyechi (sup2aSfrac12asmiddot
khaaiyaachi)
Ecircsup2jfrac12middot Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute
kheyecha
kheyecho (sup2aSfrac12amiddot
khaaiyaacha)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddot kheyeche
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddot khaaiyaache)
Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotp kheyechen
(sup2aSfrac12ajmiddotp khaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will eat sup2acsup2ajcAacute
khaabakhaabo (sup2aSc khaaiba)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben) 431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) eat
- -
Ecircsup2L kheo (sup2aSjfrac12Aacute
khaaiyo)
sup2afrac12 khaay (sup2afrac12 khaay)
sup2ap khaan (sup2ap khaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) eat
sup2ac khaaba (sup2aScsup2aScL
khaaiba
khaaiba-o)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajc khaabe (sup2aSjc khaaibe)
sup2ajcp khaaben (sup2aSjcp
khaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 20 21 March 2014
Future Perfect
I will have eaten
(Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase (Gr 464)
Rephrase 534
Future Continuous
I will be eating
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnc Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcAacute
khete thaak-ba
khete thaak-bo (sup2aSjy uasplusmnc
khaaitehellip
thaakiba)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjc khete thaak-be
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjc
khaaitehellip
thaakibe)
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnjcp khete thaak-ben
(sup2aSjy uasplusmnjcp khaaitehellip
thaakiben)
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I ate
Ecircsup2notab khelaam (sup2aSnotab
khaailaam)
Ecircsup2jnot khele
(sup2aSjnot khaaile)
Ecircsup2notEcircsup2jnotAacute khelakhelo
(sup2aSnot khaaila)
Ecircsup2jnotp khelen (sup2aSjnotp
khaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had eaten I ate
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnotab kheyechilaam
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnotab
khaaiyaa-
chilaam)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnot kheyechile
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnot khaaiyaachile)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotnot Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
kheyechila
kheyechilo (sup2aSfrac12asmiddotnot
khaaiyaachila)
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotjnotp kheyechilen
(sup2aSfrac12asmiddotjnotp
khaaiyaachilen) 5012
Past Frequentative
I should eat
Ecircsup2yab khetaam (sup2aSyab
khaaitaam)
Ecircsup2jy khete
(sup2aSjy khaaite)
Ecircsup2yEcircsup2jyAacute khetakheto
(sup2aSy khaaita)
Ecircsup2jyp kheten (sup2aSjyp
khaaiten) 504
Past Continuous
I was eating
sup2asoacutemiddotnotab khaacchilaam
(sup2aSjysmiddotnotab khaaitechilaam)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnot khaacchile
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnot
khaaitechile)
sup2asoacutemiddotnot sup2asoacutemiddotjnotAacute
khaacchila
khaacchilo (sup2aSjysmiddotnot
khaaitechila)
sup2asoacutemiddotjnotp khaacchilen
(sup2aSjysmiddotjnotp
khaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 Aasmiddot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
hellip kheye aas-chi
(hellip khaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on eating hellip hellip Ecircsup2jfrac12 parasnot (hellip sup2aSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
hellip kheye cali
(hellip khaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 21 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 535 Verbs Like ldquosup3 iacuteajpAacuterdquo (sup3 iacuteaprdquo) ldquogarjaanordquo (ldquogarjaanardquo) See Grammar 12 13
4
Identifying Verbal
Noun
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
27
Infinitive Noun
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
27
Present Participle
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy khaaite)
45
Past Participle
sup3scediliacutejfrac12 garjiye
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute garjaaiyaa)
49
Conditional Participle
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
TENSE
shortChalito Style
Aasb aami
(longSadhu Style
Aasb aami)
shortChalito Style
yrsaquosb tumi
(longSadhu Style
yrsaquosb tumi)
shortChalito Style
Ecirc yAacute se taa
(longSadhu Style
Ecirc yAacuteatildeAacute se taahaa)
shortChalito Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini
(longSadhu Style
Aazsp sysp aapani tini)
61
Present Indicative
I roar sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan) 431
Present Imperative
Let me roarhellip sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai
(sup3cediliacuteaS garjaai)
sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao
(sup3cediliacuteaL garjaao)
sup3cediliacuteaplusmn garjaay (sup3cediliacuteaFplusmnhellip
garjaauk)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan (sup3cediliacuteaFp
garjaaun) 2829
Present
Continuous
I am roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddot garjaacchi
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddot garjaaitechi)
sup3cediliacuteaoacutemiddot sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotAacute
garjaaccha
garjaaccho (sup3cediliacuteaSjymiddot
garjaaitecha)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddot garjaacche
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot
garjaaiteche)
sup3cediliacuteajoacutemiddotp garjaacchen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddotp
garjaaitechen) 462
Present Perfect
I have roared sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddot
garjiyechi
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddot
garjaaiyaachi)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12middot sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotAacute
garjiyecha
garjiyecho (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12amiddot
garjaaiyaacha)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot garjiyeche
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddot
garjaaiyaache)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddotp garjiyechen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12ajmiddotp garjaaiyaachen)
26
Future Indefinite
I will roar sup3cediliacuteacsup3cediliacuteajcAacute
garjaaba
garjaabo (sup3cediliacuteaSc
garjaaiba)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 22 21 March 2014
431
Future Imperative
Common
(You will) roar
- - sup3jcediliacuteL garjeo
sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo
(sup3cediliacuteaSjfrac12Aacute garjaaiyo)
sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay
(sup3cediliacuteafrac12 garjaay)
sup3cediliacuteap garjaan
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaan)
431
Future Imperative
(You will) roar
sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o
(sup3cediliacuteac garjaaba
sup3cediliacuteacL garjaaba-o)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajc garjaabe
(sup3cediliacuteaSjc
garjaaibe)
sup3cediliacuteajcp garjaaben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjcp
garjaaiben)
535
Future Continuous
I will be roaring
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnc sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcAacute
garjaatehellip
thaak-ba
garjaatehellip
thaak-bo (sup3cediliacuteaSjy uasplusmnc
garjaaitehellip
thaakiba)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaite
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjc garjaatehellip
thaak-be
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjc
garjaaitehellip
thaakibe)
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnjcp garjaatehellip
thaak-ben
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyhellip uasplusmnjcp
garjaaitehellip
thaakiben)
Future Perfect
I will have roared
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
(Gr 464)
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
I roared
sup3cediliacuteanotab garjaalaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSnotab
garjaailaam)
sup3cediliacuteajnot garjaale
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnot garjaaile)
sup3cediliacuteanotsup3cediliacuteajnotAacute garjaala
garjaalo
(sup3cediliacuteaSnot garjaaila)
sup3cediliacuteajnotp garjaalen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjnotp
garjaailen) 4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
I had roared I roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnotab garjiyechilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnotab
garjaaiyaa-
chilaam)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnot garjiyechile
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnot garjaaiyaachile)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotnot sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotAacute
garjiyechila
garjiyechilo (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotnot garjaaiyaachila)
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotjnotp garjiyechilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12asmiddotjnotp garjaaiyaachilen)
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 23 21 March 2014
5012
Past Frequentative
I should roar
sup3cediliacuteayab garjaataam
(sup3cediliacuteaSyab
garjaaitaam)
sup3cediliacuteajy garjaate
(sup3cediliacuteaSjy garjaaite)
sup3cediliacuteaysup3cediliacuteajyAacute garjaata
garjaato (sup3cediliacuteaSy
garjaaita)
sup3cediliacuteajyp garjaaten
(sup3cediliacuteaSjyp
garjaaiten) 505
Past Continuous
I was roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnotab garjaacchilaam
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnotab
garjaaite-
chilaam)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnot garjaacchile
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnot garjaaitechile)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotnot
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotAacute garjaacchila
garjaacchilo (sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotnot
garjaaitechila)
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotjnotp garjaacchilen
(sup3cediliacuteaSjysmiddotjnotp
garjaaitechilen)
Note also other forms of expression
Irsquove been roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 Aasmiddot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute Aasjysmiddot)
garjiye aas-chi
(garjaaiyaa aasitechi)
I go on roaring sup3scediliacutejfrac12 parasnot (sup3cediliacuteaSfrac12Aacute parasnot)
garjiye cali
(garjaaiyaa cali)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 24 21 March 2014
GRAMMAR 536 Declension for Second Person Inferior ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo tui See Grammar 532
TENSE
to do
plusmnmAacute karaa
to eat
sup2aLfrac12Aacute khaaoyaa
to roar
sup3cediliacuteajpAacute garjaano
(sup3cediliacuteap garjaana)
61
Present Indicative thou doest
plusmnsmIcirc karis thou eatest
sup2aSIcirc khaais thou roarest
sup3cediliacuteaSIcirc garjaais 431
Present Imperative Let thou dohellip
plusmnmIcirc kar Let thou eathellip
sup2Aacute khaa
Let thou roarhellip
sup3cediliacuteAacute garjaa 2829
Present
Continuous
thou art doing
plusmnmsmiddotIcirc kar-chis thou art eating
sup2asoacutemiddotIcirc khaacchis thou art roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotIcirc garjaacchis
462
Present Perfect
thou hast doing
plusmnjmsmiddotIcirc karechis thou hast eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotIcirc kheyechis thou hast roared
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotIcirc garjiyechis
26
Future Indefinite
thou willst do
plusmnmsc kar-bi
thou willst eat
sup2asc khaabi thou willst roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 431
Future Imperative
Common
(thou willst) do
plusmnEcirccAacute karo plusmnsmIcirc karis
(thou willst) eat
sup2AacuteIcirc khaas (thou willst) roar
sup3scediliacuteIcirc garjis
431
Future Imperative
(thou willst) do
plusmnmIcircsc karbi (thou willst) eat
sup2asc khaabi (thou willst) roar
sup3cediliacuteasc garjaabi 533
Future Continuous
I will be doing
plusmnmjy uaplusmnsc kar-te thaak-bi
Ecircsup2jy uaplusmnsc khete thaak-bi
sup3cediliacuteajy uaplusmnsc garjaate thaak-bi
464
Future Perfect
thou willst have done
Rephrase
thou willst have eaten
Rephrase
thou willst have roared
Rephrase
34
Past Simple Narrative
Past Historic
thou didst
plusmnmsnot kar-li thou didst
Ecircsup2jnot kheli thou didst
sup3cediliacuteasnot garjaali
4623
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Common Past
thou hadst donethou didst
plusmnjmsmiddotsnot karechili
thou hadst donethou didst
Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddotsnot kheyechili
thou hadst donethou didst
sup3scediliacutejfrac12smiddotsnot garjiyechili
5012
Past Frequentative thou shouldst do
plusmnmsyIcirc kar-tis
thou shouldst eat
Ecircsup2syIcirc khetis thou shouldst roar
sup3cediliacuteasyIcirc garjaatis 504
Past Continuous
thou werst doing
plusmnmsmiddotsnot kar-chili thou werst eating
sup2asoacutemiddotsnot khaacchile
thou werst roaring
sup3cediliacuteasoacutemiddotsnot garjaacchili
The above table states the short form singular There is also a long form such as ldquosup2aSjysmiddotIcircrdquo ldquokhaaitechisrdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotIcirc ldquokhaaiyaachisrdquo sup2aSsc ldquokhaaibirdquo ldquosup2aSfrac12asmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaiyaachilirdquo ldquosup2aSjysmiddotsnotrdquo ldquokhaaitechilirdquo
The plural for ldquoyrsaquoSrdquo ldquotuirdquo is ldquoEcircyamAacuterdquo ldquotoraardquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 25 21 March 2014
Cardinal Numbers Zero One Two Three hellip
0 0
shuunya
eumlethicirc
1 1
ek
Jplusmn
2 2
dui
UcircS
3 3
tin
syp
4 4
caar
paraam
5 5
p^aac
zIumlapara
6 6
chay
middotfrac12
7 7
saat
ay
8 8
aat
Aaq
9 9
nay
pfrac12
10 10
dash
ireg
11 11
egaara
Jsup3am
12 12
baara
cam
13 13
tera
Ecircym
14 14
coodda
Ecircparaagraveeacute
15 15
panera
zjpm
16 16
sola
Ecirciquestanot
17 17
satera
jym
18 18
aathaara
Aajwm
19 19
unnish
Gspreg
20 20
bish
screg
21 21
ekush
Jplusmnsbquoreg
22 22
baaish
caSreg
23 23
teish
EcircySreg
24 24
cabbish
parasCAtildereg
25 25
p^acish
zIumlsparareg
26 26
chaabbish
middotasCAtildereg
27 27
saataash
ayareg
28 28
aathaash
Aawareg
29 29
uunatrish
Gpsecircreg
30 30
trish
secircreg
31 31
ekatrish
Jplusmnsecircreg
32 32
batrish
csecircreg
33 33
tetrish
Ecircysecircreg
34 34
cootrish
Ecircparaagravesecircreg
35 35
p^ayatrish
zIumlfrac12secircreg
36 36
chatrish
middotsecircreg
37 37
s^aaitrish
IumlaSsecircreg
38 38
aat-trish
Aaqsecircreg
39 39
uunacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
40 40
callish
parasligravereg
41 41
ekacallish
Jplusmnparasligravereg
42 42
biyaallish
scfrac12asligravereg
43 43
tetaallish
Ecircyyasligravereg
44 44
cuyaallish
pararsaquofrac12asligravereg
45 45
p^ayataallish
zIumlfrac12yasligravereg
46 46
checallish
Ecircmiddotparasligravereg
47 47
saat-challish
aymiddotsligravereg
48 48
aat-callish
Aaqparasligravereg
49 49
uunapansup2caash
GpzTHORNareg
50 50
pansup2caash
zTHORNareg
51 51
ekaanna
JplusmnapETH
52 52
baahaanna
caatildeap ETH
53 53
tippaanna
syzUacuteapETH
54 54
cuyaanna
pararsaquofrac12apETH
55 55
pansup2caanna
zTHORNapETH
56 56
chaappaanna
middotazUacuteapETH
57 57
saataanna
ayapETH
58 58
aataanna
AaqapETH
59 59
uunasaat
Gpiquestaq
60 60
saat
iquestaq
61 61
ek-satti
Jplusmniquestslsaquo
62 62
baasatti
caiquestslsaquo
63 63
tesatti
Ecircyiquestslsaquo
64 64
coosatti
Ecircparaagraveiquestslsaquo
65 65
p^ayasatti
zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo
66 66
chesatti
Ecircmiddotiquestslsaquo
67 67
saat-satti
ayiquestslsaquo
68 68
aat-satti
Aaqiquestslsaquo
69 69
uunasattar
Gpraquom
70 70
sattar
raquom
71 71
ekaattar
Jplusmnaraquom
72 72
baahaattar
caatildearaquom
73 83
tiyaattar
syfrac12araquom
74 74
cuyaattar
pararsaquofrac12araquom
75 75
p^acaattar
zIumlparaaraquom
76 76
chiyaattar
smiddotfrac12araquom
77 77
saataattar
ayaraquom
78 78
aataattar
Aaqaraquom
79 79
uunaashi
Gpasreg
80 80
aashi
Aasreg
81 81
ekaashi
Jplusmnasreg
82 82
biraashi
scmasreg
83 83
tiraashi
symasreg
84 84
curaashi
pararsaquomasreg
85 85
p^acaashi
zIumlparaasreg
86 86
chiyaashi
smiddotfrac12asreg
87 87
saataashi
ayasreg
88 88
aataashi
Aaqasreg
89 89
uunanabbai
GppCAtildeS
90 90
nabbai
pCAtildeS
91 91
ekaanabbai
JplusmnapCAtildeS
92 92 biraanabbai
scmapCAtildeS
93 93
tiraanabbai
symapCAtildeS
94 94
curaanabbai
pararsaquomapCAtildeS
95 95
p^ac-aanabbai
zIumlparaapCAtildeS
96 96 chiyaanabbai
smiddotfrac12apCAtildeS
97 97 saataanabbai
ayapCAtildeS
98 98 aataanabbai
AaqapCAtildeS
99 99 niraanabbai
spmapCAtildeS
There are variations in spellings and use of some of these numbers-
plusmnsbquosE kuri may be used for twenty instead of screg bish
sysmreg tirish may be used for thirty instead of secircreg trish
iquestaw saath may be used for sixty instead of iquestaq saat
Aaq aat- may be used for -eight instead ofqaAaw- aath- in 28 38 48 68 Fp- un- may be used for one-less-than instead of Gp- uun- in 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 reg EcircregAacute or regy sha sho or shat mean hundred 100 200 is treated as two hundreds UcircS reg dui sha and so on
atildeacedilam or atildeIacute haajaar or sahasra mean thousand 1000 2000 is treated as two thousands UcircS atildeacedilam dui haajaar and so on
notasup2 or notntilde laakh or laksa mean hundred thousand 100000 Ecircplusmnsq or EcircecircMaE koti or kror mean ten million 1000000 chethi brrinda means one thousand million 1000000000 regccedilsup2 shansup1kha is one million million 10000000000000 batildeazIAcirc mahaapadma is a hundred million million
1000000000000000
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 26 21 March 2014
Fractions 14 14 poyaa Ecirczafrac12Aacute 12 12 aadhaa AaoAacute 34 34 tin poyaa syp Ecirczafrac12Aacute 1 1 ek Jplusmn 114 114 p^aac poyaa zIumlapara Ecirczafrac12Aacute 112 112 der EcirciE 134 134 saat poyaa ay Ecirczafrac12Aacute 2 2 dui UcircS 214 214 nay poyaa pfrac12 Ecirczafrac12Aacute 212 212 aaraai AaEaS
For larger fractions use-
+ 14 saoyaa (sawaa) Lfrac12Aacute + 12 saare ajE
- 14 poone Ecirczagravejp
234 234 poone tin Ecirczajp syp 3 3 tin syp 314 314 saoyaa tin Lfrac12Aacute syp 312 312 saare tin ajE syp 334 334 poone caar Ecirczagravejp paraam 4 4 caar paraam
Ajoiacuteplusmn ardhek stands for the quantity of ldquoa halfrdquo of something
Expression of other fractions is by stating ldquoof the total number of parts forming the whole so many parts
are presentrdquo For example-
23 = syp vajsup3m UcircS vasup3
23 = tin bhaager
dui bhaag
23 = out of three parts two
parts (two parts out of three)
Percentages can be expressed in either of two ways ldquoso many per cent in every hundredrdquo or ldquoworking in
a hundred so manyrdquo-
zIumlapara lsquozsy regy p^aac prati shat 5 = 5 in every hundred
regyplusmnmAacute zIumlapara shat-karaa p^aac 5 = in a hundred 5
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 27 21 March 2014
Ordinal Numbers First Second Third [GRAMMAR 573]
(See Grammar 582 for dates)
lsquozub (1b) pratham first (1st)
sIAtildeydfrac12 (2frac12) dvitiiya second (2nd)
yŸydfrac12 (3frac12) trritiiya third (3rd)
parayrsaquouiacute (4uiacute) caturtha fourth (4th)
zTHORNb (5b) pansup2cam fifth (5th)
iquestoslash (6oslash) sasta sixth (6th)
zUgraveb (7b) saptam seventh (7th)
Aoslashb (8b) astam eighth (8th)
pcb (9b) nabam ninth (9th)
iregb (10b) dasham tenth (10th)
Jplusmnaireg(yb) 11(b) ekaadash(tam) eleven(th) 11(th)
IAtildeaireg(yb) 12(b) dvaadash(tam) twelf(th) 12(th)
ecircjfrac12aireg(yb) 13(b) trayodash(tam) thirteen(th) 13(th)
parayrsaquoeacuteiacutereg(yb) 14(b) caturddash(tam) fourteen(th) 14(th)
zTHORNireg(yb) 15(b) pansup2cadash(tam) fifteen(th) 15(th)
Ecircamareg(yb) 16(b) sorash(tam) sixteen(th) 16(th)
zUgraveireg(yb) 17(b) saptadash(tam) seventeen(th) 17(th)
Aoslashaireg(yb) 18(b) astaadash(tam) eighteen(th) 18(th)
GpscEgravereg(yb) 19(b) uunibinordmsha(tam) nineteen(th) 19(th)
scEgravereg(yb) 20(b) binordmsha(tam) twenti(eth) 20(th)
secircEgravereg(yb) 30(b) trinordmsha(tam) thirti(eth) 30(th)
paraYAtildeasAringograveEgravereg(yb) 40(b) catvaastrinordmsha(tam) forti(eth) 40(th)
zTHORNareg(raquob) 50(b) pansup2caashat(tam) fifti(eth) 50(th)
regy(yb) 100(b) shat(tam) hundred(th) 100(th)
atildeIacute(yb) 1000(b) sahasra(tam) thousand(th) 1000(th)
The tabulation above shows that ordinal numbers up to ldquotenthrdquo are all special meaning that they bear little
resemblance to the cardinal series given in Grammar 571 The ordinals listed from ldquoeleventhrdquo to
ldquonineteenthrdquo are formed by adding ldquo-ybrdquo ldquo-tamrdquo meaning ldquo-thrdquo to an old cardinal series Ordinals in higher
decades can be formed similarly but changing the ending to suit the tens involved The feminine ending
adds ldquomdashdrdquo ldquo-iirdquo
Pentecost being the 50th day is ldquozTHORNaregraquobdm siprdquo ldquopancaashattamiir dinrdquo
It is common practice to take the simpler approach of forming ordinals by using the Possessive Case of the
cardinal numbers listed in Grammar 571 especially for ordinals above ldquotwentiethrdquo
See also DATES for the use of a different system of ordinal numbers
Hence ldquo69thrdquo becomes ldquoGpraquojmmrdquo ldquouunasattarerrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 28 21 March 2014
Approximation [GRAMMAR 574]
ldquo-Jplusmnrdquo ldquo-ekrdquo is appended to a number to say approximately that number-
UcircJplusmn duek about 2
ajyplusmn saatek about 7
ldquosup2ajpplusmnrdquo ldquokhaanekrdquo is placed after a dimension to say approximately that value-
sip sup2ajpplusmn din khaanek approximately a day
ldquolsquozafrac12rdquo ldquopraayrdquo is placed in front of a value to say approximately than amount
lsquozafrac12 syp acuteethqAacute praay tin ghantaa about three hours
ldquolsquozafrac12 swplusmnrdquo ldquopraay thikrdquo means ldquoapproximaterdquo ldquoabout rightrdquo
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 29 21 March 2014
MONTHS AND SEASONS
There are 12 months in the Bengali calendar They go from mid-month to mid-month on the English
calendar The 6 seasons each relate to a pair of Bengali months
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Ecirczagraveiquest poos
JANUARY ---------- regdy shiita (winter)
---------- baacute maagh
FEBRUARY ---------- ------------------------------
---------- xanotIcircOacutet phaalgun
MARCH ---------- cPUgrave basanta (spring)
---------- Eumlparaecirc ceetra
APRIL ---------- ------------------------------
---------- Eumlcregasup2 beeshaakh
MAY ---------- lsquosup3dNtildeš griisma (summer)
---------- Eumlcedilordmoslash jyeesta
JUNE ---------- ------------------------------
---------- AaiquestaR aasaarh
JULY ---------- ciquestiacuteAacute barsaa (rainy)
---------- lsquoregact shraaban
AUGUST ---------- ------------------------------
---------- valsquoi bhaadra
SEPTEMBER ---------- regmugrave sharat (autumn)
---------- AaregAtildedp aashviin
OCTOBER ---------- ------------------------------
---------- plusmnajraquoiacuteplusmn kaarttik
NOVEMBER ---------- EcircatildebPUgrave hemanta (dewy)
---------- Alsquosup3atildeafrac12t agrahaayan
DECEMBER ---------- ------------------------------
The names of months as used in Europe are frequently used these days however but their pronunciation
and related spelling are adapted to reflect the Bengali style
cedilapffrac12asm jaanuyaari
EcircxcIacuteAEligfrac12asm phebruyaari
baparaiacute maarc
Jslsquoznot epril
Ecircb me
cedilrsaquop jun
cedilrsaquonotaS julaai
Aasup3laquoq aagast
EcircjdaggerqBAtildem septembar
AjQacm aktobar
EcircpajvBAtildem nabhembar
sejBAtildem disembar
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 30 21 March 2014
DATES
Days of the week are listed in Vocabulary 162 Ordinal numbers for days in a month are-
zjatildenotAacute zfrac12notAacute pahelaa payalaa first (1st)
EcirciaIacuteAacute dosraa second (2nd)
EcircyIacuteAacute tesraa third (3rd)
EcircparaagravewAacute coothaa fourth (4th)
Add ldquo-Srdquo ldquo-irdquo to the cardinal numbers between 5 and 18 (see Grammar 571) for example-
zIumlaparaS p^aanc-i fifth (5th)
Add ldquo-Jrdquo ldquo-erdquo to the cardinal numbers between 19 and 31 (see Grammar 571) for example-
FspETHjreg uunishe nineteenth (19th)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 31 21 March 2014
TIME ON THE CLOCK
Fractions of an Hour
The numerical fractions given in Grammar 572 are combined with the particle ldquoqAacuterdquo ldquo-taardquo to define the
time on the clock to the nearest quarter of an hour
zajp JplusmnqAacute poone ek-taa a quarter to one
JplusmnqAacute ek-taa one oclock
Lfrac12Aacute JplusmnqAacute saoyaa ek-taa a quarter past one
EcirciEqAacute der-taa half past one
Ecirczagravejp UcircIcircqAacute poone dutaa a quarter to two
UcircqAacute dutaa two
Lfrac12Aacute UcircqAacute saoyaa dutaa a quarter past two
AaEaqAacute aaraaitaa half past two
Ecirczagravejp sypqAacute poone tin-taa a quarter to three
sypqAacute tin-taa three oclock
Lfrac12Aacute sypqAacute saoyaa tin-taa a quarter past three
ajE sypqAacute saare tin-taa half past three
Ecirczagravejp paraamqAacute poone caar-taa a quarter to four
paraamqAacute caar-taa four oclock
Oclock
ldquocacedilAacuterdquo baajaa meaning to strike is used for telling what the time is what time has last struck or what
time is striking next
To state the time that has struck as a whole hour or fraction of an hour use ldquo-qAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot)rdquo -taa bejeche (baajiyaache) For example-
If the time has just struck on the hour of one oclock
It is one oclock = It has struck one or One has struck
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot (cascedilfrac12ajmiddot) ek-taa bejeche (baajiyaache)
Minutes After the Hour
To state the time as a number of minutes past the last hour that has struck append the number of minutes
to the time for the hour
It is seven minutes past one = It is [has been] seven minutes after having struck one
JplusmnqAacute Ecirccjcedil ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildejfrac12jmiddot] ek-taa beje saat minit aache [or hayeche]
(JplusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12Aacute ay sbspq Aajmiddot [or atildeSfrac12ajmiddot]
ek-taa baajiyaa saat minit aache [or haiyaache])
On a digital clock system this would be one seven-
JplusmnqAacute ay ek-taa saat
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 32 21 March 2014
Minutes Before the Hour
State the time as the number of minutes in which the next hour is [will be] striking-
It is twenty three minutes to two = Striking two will be twenty three minutes
UcircqAacute cacediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildejc] dutaa baaj-te teish minit aache [habe]
(UcircqAacute cascediljy EcircySreg sbspq Aajmiddot [atildeSjc] dutaa baajite teish minit aache [haibe])
On a digital clock system this would be one thirty seven-
JplusmnqAacute Iumlasecircreg ek-taa s^aaitrish
Asking the Time
To ask what the time is you ask How many times has it struck Accordingly how many is combined
with the particle This is usually shortened and the apostrophe inserted to indicate this
What is the time = ldquoHow many have struck [or strike]rdquo
ldquoHow many have struckrdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa [katataa] bejeche
(plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cascedilfrac12ajmiddot
kataa [katataa] baajiyaache
ldquoHow many strikerdquo
plusmnqAacute [plusmnyqAacute] cajcedil kataa [katataa] baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 33 21 March 2014
STUDY REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS
Notes 1 Words enclosed in round brackets ( ) are in saadhu baandeglaa Calita baandeglaa is used generally
2 Words enclosed in square brackets are optional or alternatives
Study 1 1 I you he you he Aasb yrsaquosb Ecirc Aazsp sysp aami tumi se aapani tini
2 It is yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aajmiddot taa (taahaa) aache
3 He is well Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot sebhaalo (bhaala) aache
4 How are you Aazsp Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddotp aapani keman aachen
5 I am ill Aasb AfAringOtilde Aasmiddot aami asustha aachi
6 It is good yAacute vajnotAacute Aajmiddot (yAacuteatildeAacute vanot Aajmiddot) taa bhaalo aache (taahaa bhaala aache)
7 Verb endings used when the stem ends in a consonant 1st 2nd 3rd
or Honorific
[2nd or 3rd]
After a stem ending in a
Consonant
1
Aasb aami
-s- -i
2
yrsaquosb tumi
-Ecirc-Aacute (- [=A]) -o (-a)
3
Ecirc se
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-Ecirc- -e
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-Ecirc-p -en
Study 2 1 He is there Ecirc Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot se okhaane aache
2 I am here Aasb Jsup2ajp Aasmiddot aami ekhaane aachi
3 Where are you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi kothaay (aacha)
4 Thank you oethicirccai dhanyabaad
5 The friend is here ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bandhu ekhaane aache
6 The little sister is there Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot chota bon okhaane aache
7 How is the little sister Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnbp Aajmiddot chota bon keman aache
8 The big brother is here cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
9 The big brother is a friend cE vaS ciumlsbquo Aajmiddot bara bhaai bandhu aache
10 Who is there Ecircplusmn Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot ke okhaane aache
11 Who is sick Ecircplusmn AfAringOtilde Aajmiddot ke asustha aache
12 Here is the big brother cE vaS Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot bara bhaai ekhaane aache
13 Where is the little friend Ecircmiddotaq ciumlsbquo Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot chota bandhu kothaay aache
Study 3 1 English friend SEgravejmcedil ciumlsbquo indegrej bandhu Bengali brother caaringanotd vaS baansup1gaalii bhaai
2 English language SEgravejmcedild vaiquestAacute indegrejii bhaasaa
3 Bengali language caEgravenotAacute vaiquestAacute baandeglaa bhaasaa
4 This message [is] good J Egravecai vanot e sandegbaad bhaala
5 This is Bengali language J vaiquestAacute caEgravenotAacute e bhaasaa baandeglaa
6 Little English brother Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedil vaS chota indegrej bhaai
7 Big Bengali sister cE caaringanotd Ecirccap bara baansup1gaalii bon
8 The unwell Bengali sister is here AfAringOtilde caaringanotd Ecirccap Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot asustha baansup1gaalii bon ekhaane
aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 34 21 March 2014
9 The good Bengali brother is there vanot caaringanotd vaS Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot bhaala baansup1gaalii bhaai okhaane
aache
10 This work [is] good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala)
11 I indeed am that brother AasbS K vaS aami-i ee bhaai
12 This particularly [is] good work JS vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnacedil ei bhaalo (bhaala) kaaj
13 He indeed [is] good syspS vajnotAacute (vanot)| tini-i bhaalo (bhaala)
Study 4 1 Give the book cS sip bai din
2 Take this message JS Egravecai spp ei sandegbaad nin
3 I do you do Aasb plusmnsm yrsaquosb plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) aami kari tumi kara (karo)
he does you do Ecirc plusmnjm Aazsp plusmnjmp se kare aapani karen
4 I speak you are Aasb csnot yrsaquosb AajmiddotAacute (Aamiddot) aami bali tumi aacha (aacho)
he reads it does Ecirc zjE yAacute (yaatildeAacute) plusmnjm se pare taa (taahaa) kare
5 He speaks you do sysp cjnotp Aazsp plusmnjmp tini balen aapani karen
6 The Bengali daughter is there caaringanotd Ecircbjfrac12 Lsup2ajp Aajmiddot| baansup1gaalii meye okhaane aache
7 The little woman reads Ecircmiddotaq Aringograved zjE chota strii pare
8 The big man does work cE bapfiquest plusmnacedil plusmnjm bara maanus kaaj kare
9 Read this little English book J Ecircmiddotaq SEgravejmcedild cS zEfp e chota indegrejii bai parun
10 The English man reads Bengali SEgravejmcedil bapfiquest caEgravenotAacute zjE indegrej maanus baandeglaa pare
11 The little son is well Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnot vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota chele bhaalo (bhaala) aache
Study 5 1 See you again Aacam Ecircisup2Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc) aabaar dekhaa habe (haibe)
2 He [is] a good son Ecirc vajnotAacute (vanot) Ecircmiddotjnot se bhaalo (bhaala) chele
NB To form questions using splusmn ki or plusmnd kii
what Place plusmnd (splusmn) kii (ki) where you would have put what it is replacing in the
sentence
whether splusmn ki mdash Place this key in front of the door you want to open in the sentence so
to speak
is it so Place splusmn ki at the end of the sentence
3 Gods name [is] what DregAtildejmm pab plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer naam kii (ki) 4 What [is] your name Aazpam pab plusmnd (splusmn) aapanaar naam kii (ki)
5 Gods book [is] what DregAtildejmm cS plusmnd (splusmn) iishbarer bai kii (ki)
6 Gods book [is] good DregAtildejmm cS vajnotAacute| iishbarer bai bhaalo (bhaala)
7 What [is] this book J cS plusmnd (splusmn) e bai kii (ki)
8 The parents are here szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot pitaamaataa ekhaane aache
9 The father and son are there szyAacute JcEgrave Ecircmiddotjnot Lplusmnajp Aajmiddot pitaa ebandeg chele okhaane aache
10 Are your parents here Aazpam cacabAacute splusmn Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aapanaar baabaamaa ki ekhaane
aache
[ or szyabayAacute pitaamaataa]
11 Are you well yrsaquosb splusmn vajnotAacute (Aamiddot) tumi ki bhaalo (bhaala) aacha
12 Is the little man well Ecircmiddotaq bapfiquest splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) Aajmiddot chota maanus ki bhaalo (bhaala) aache
13 My your her its your his Aabam Ecircyabam yam (yaatildeam) yam (yaatildeam) Aazpam yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) aamaar tomaar taar (taahaar) taar (taahaar) aapanaar t^aar (t^aahaar)
14 Your good friend Ecircyabam vajnotAacute (vanot) ciumlsbquo tomaar bhaalo (bhaala) bandhu
15 Your Bengali book Aazpam caEgravenotAacute cS aapanaar baandeglaa bai
16 His unwell daughter is where yam (yaatildeam) AfAringOtilde Ecircbjfrac12 Ecircplusmnauafrac12 Aajmiddot taar (taahaar) asustha
meye kothaay aache
17 Gods DregAtildejmm Ecircsup2aiam iishvarer khodaar
18 Of the sister Ecirccajpm boner
19 Of the little man Ecircmiddotaq bapfjiquestm chota maanuser
20 Of the big book cE cSJm bara baier
21 The name of the big book cE cSJm pab bara baier naam
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 35 21 March 2014
22 The work of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm plusmnacedil baansup1gaalii boner kaaj
23 The English brothers mothers name SEgravejmcedil vaSjfrac12m bayam pab indegrej bhaaiyer maataar naam
24 The name of the book of the Bengali sister caaringanotd Ecirccajpm cSJm pab baansup1gaalii boner baier
naam
25 Your friends Bengali work Ecircyabam ciumlsbquom caEgravenotAacute plusmnacedil tomaar bandhur baandeglaa kaaj
Study 6 1 Witness question answer yes no antilded lsquozregETH Fraquom atildeIumlAacute (atildeIumlordmAacute) pAacute saaksii prashna uttar hy^aa
(h^aa) naa
2 Many not many holy understand Ajpplusmn AlUacute zscecirc cfsup1Aacute anek alpa pabitra bujhaa
Study 7 1 Witnesses do preaching antildedmAacute lsquozparaam plusmnjm saaksiiraa pracaar kare
2 Gods commandment [is] good DregAtildejmm AaiexclAacute vajnotAacute (vanot) iishbarer aajnaa [aagyaa] bhaalo
(bhaala)
3 Jesus [is] king DAacute macedilAacute iisaa raajaa
4 God does good sysp vajnotAacute (vanot) plusmnjmp tini bhaalo (bhaala) karen
5 We YOU they YOU they AabmAacute EcircyabmAacute yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) AazpamAacute yIumlamAacute (yIumlaatildeamAacute) aamaraa
tomaraa taaraa (taahaaraa) aapanaaraa t^aaraa (t^aahaaraa)
6 We do work AabmAacute plusmnacedil plusmnsm aamaraa kaaj kari
7 We understand Gods will AabmAacute DregAtildejmm SoacutemiddotAacute cfssup1 aamaraa iishbarer icchaa bujhi
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacutem khodaar]
8 The parents do more work cacabajfrac12mAacute AamL plusmnacedil plusmnjm baabaamaayeraa aar-o kaaj kare
[ or szyabayamAacute pitaamaataaraa]
9 The little children do less work Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 plusmnb plusmnacedil plusmnjm chota chelemeye kam kaaj kare
10 Our YOUR their YOUR their Aabajim Ecircyabajim yajim (yaatildeajim) Aazpajim yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) aamaader tomaader taader (taahaader) aapanaader t^aader (t^aahaader)
11 Our friend is here Aabajim ciumlsbquo Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot aamaader bandhu ekhaane aache
12 Where is YOUR little sister Aazpajim Ecircmiddotaq Ecirccap Ecircplusmnauafrac12 aapanaader chota bon kothaay
13 Their word is our commandment yIumlajim (yIumlaatildeajim) plusmnuAacute Aabajim AaiexclAacute| t^aader (t^aahaader)
kathaa aamaader aajnaa [aagyaa]
Study 8 1 Two women [generally] UcircScedilp Aringograved duijan strii
two women [by number] UcircS Aringograved dui strii
2 Three Bengali sisters sypcedilp caaringanotd Ecirccap tin-jan baansup1gaalii bon
3 One elder Jplusmncedilp lsquozaparadp vaS ek-jan praaciin bhaai
4 Sinners zazdmAacute zazdsup3t paapiiraa paapiigan
5 Idols lsquozsybasup3t lsquozsybaOacutejnotAacute pratimaagan pratimaagulo
6 Books cSOacutejnotAacute cSOacutesnot cSplusmnnot cSsup3t baigulo baiguli baisaksal baigan
7 Friends ciumlsbquomAacute bandhuraa
8 Little daughters Ecircmiddotaq Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12 [or Ecircmiddotaq Ecircbjfrac12mAacute] chota chota meye [or chota meyeraa]
9 Many faithful ones scregAtildeadmAacute scregAtildeadsup3t bishbaasiiraa bishbaasiigan
Study 9 [Vocabulary 91] and Study 10
1 I bring the message Aasb Egravecai Aasp aami sandegbaad aani
2 I call Gods name Aasb DregAtildejmm pab easplusmn aami iishbarer naam daaki
3 Sinners die zazdmAacute [or zazdsup3t] permiljm paapiiraa [or paapiigan] mare
4 I read the book Aasb cS zsE aami bai pari
5 He sits here Ecirc Jsup2ajp cj se ekhaane base
6 The faithful survive scregAtildeadmAacute cIumlajpara bishbaasiraa b^aace
Study 11 1 Insert the verb endings [used when the stem ends in a vowel]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 36 21 March 2014
1st 2nd 3rd or
Honorific [2nd or
3rd]
After a stem ending
in a Vowel
1 Aasb aami -S -i
2 yrsaquosb tumi -L -o 3
Ecirc se yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa (taahaa)
-frac12 -y
N
Aazsp aapani
sysp tini
-p -n
2 I want Aasb paraaS aami caai
you go yrsaquosb naL tumi yaao
he gets Ecirc zafrac12 se paay
3 You eat Aazsp sup2ap aapani khaan
he desires sysp paraap tini caan
4 We prove to be AabmAacute atildeS aamaraa hai
YOU do not prove to be EcircyabmAacute atildeL pAacute tomaraa hao naa
5 I take Aasb spS aami ni-i [nei]
you take yrsaquosb EcircpL tumi neo
he takes Ecirc Ecircpfrac12Icirc se ney 6 They take yIumlamAacute spp t^aaraa nin
(yIumlaatildeamAacute Ecircpp t^aahaaraa nen)
YOU take AazpamAacute spp aapanaaraa nin
AazpamAacute Ecircpp aapanaaraa nen
we take AabmAacute spS aamaraa ni-i
AabmAacute EcircpS aamaraa nei
7 They dont sing [sing not] yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) sup3afrac12 pAacute taaraa (taahaaraa) gaay naa
8 We dont get peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave zaS pAacute aamaraa shaanti paai naa
9 My book gives a good answer Aabam cS vajnotAacute (vanot) Fraquom Ecircifrac12 aamaar bai bhaalo (bhaala) uttar
dey
10 Many children do not eat Ajpplusmn Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 sup2afrac12 pAacute anek chelemeye khaay naa
11 We go there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp naS aamaraa okhaane yaai
Study 12 1 Their faith [is] dead yajim (yaatildeajim) scregAtildea bhy taahaader (taader) bishbaas mrrita
2 Is our faith alive Aabajim scregAtildea splusmn cedildscy aamaader bishbaas ki jiibita
3 Much violence happens Ajpplusmn satildeEgraveAacute acutejq anek hindegsaa ghate
4 We see a little [not much] rain there AabmAacute Lsup2ajp AlUacute chsoslash Ecircissup2 aamaraa okhaane alpa brristi
dekhi
5 I run you run he runs Aasb EcirciagraveEaS yrsaquosb EcirciagraveEaL Ecirc EcirciagraveEafrac12 aami dooraai tumi dooraao se
dooraay
6 You run she runs Aazsp EcirciagraveEap sysp EcirciagraveEap aapani dooraan tini dooraan
7 We flee AabmAacute zanotaS aamaraa paalaai
you sleep yrsaquosb acutefbaL tumi ghumaao
they hide yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) notfplusmnafrac12 taahaaraa lukaay 8 We want peace AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS aamaraa shaanti caai
Study 13
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 37 21 March 2014
1 I become awake [myself] Aasb cedilassup3 [= I awake] aami jaagi
2 I cause [someone] to wake up Aasb cedilasup3aS [=I arouse] aami jaagaai
3 I move around [myself] Aasb parasnot
[= I go] aami cali
4 I cause [someone] to move Aasb paraanotaS
[= I drive] aami caalaai
5 I see Aasb Ecircissup2 aami dekhi
I cause [someone] to see Aasb Ecircisup2aS
[= I show] aami dekhaai
6 You learn yrsaquosb Ecircregjsup2Aacute (sregsup2) tumi shekho (shikha)
You cause [someone] to learn yrsaquosb sregplusmnaL
[= you teach] tumi shikhaao
7 He returns Ecirc sxjm se phire
He causes [someonething] to return Ecirc sxmafrac12 [= he turns or returns] se phiraay
He causes the mind to turn round Ecirc [bp] sxmafrac12
[=he repents] se [man] phiraay
Study 14 1 Event sign creator earth acuteqpAacute sparaatildeM hsoslashplusmnyiacuteAacute (hsoslashplusmnraquoiacuteAacute) zhsucd ghatanaa cihna srristikartaa
(srristikarttaa) prrithibii
2 I believe Aasb scregAtildea plusmnsm aami bishbaas kari
you believe yrsaquosb scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi bishbaas karo (kara)
he believes Ecirc scregAtildea plusmnjm se bishbaas kare
3 You believe Aazsp scregAtildea plusmnjmp aapani bishbaas karen
he believes sysp scregAtildea plusmnjmp tini bishbaas karen
4 He creates sysp hsoslash plusmnjmp tini srristi karen
5 Jehovah delivers snjatildeacAacute mntildeAacute plusmnjmp yihobaa raksaa karen
6 He destroys this world sysp J cedilsup3ugrave OcentEgrave plusmnjmp tini e jaagat dhvandegsa karen
7 They make many prayers yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Ajpplusmn lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjm taahaaraa (taaraa) anek praarthanaa kare
8 People of false religion make war vrsaquonot [sbuordmAacute] ojbiacutem Ecircnotaplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm bhul [mithyaa] dharmer lok
yuddha kare
Study 15 [See also idioms in Study 54]
1 We are pleased AabmAacute Pszligoslash atildeS aamaraa santusta hai
2 (It) feels cold regdy notajsup3 shiit laage
3 (It) takes time bfrac12 notajsup3 samay laage
We spend time there aamaraa okhaane samay laagaai
AabmAacute Lsup2ajp bfrac12 notasup3aS 4 He comes back Ecirc sxjm (sxsmfrac12Aacute) Aaj se phire (phiriyaa) aase
5 He goes away Ecirc parajnot (parasnotfrac12Aacute) nafrac12 se cale (caliyaa) yaay
6 That builds up our faith
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) Aabajim scregAtildea sup3jE (sup3sEfrac12Aacute) Ecircyajnot taa (taahaa) aamaader bishbaas gare (gariyaa) tole
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 38 21 March 2014
NB The Verb Endings in the Present Tense-
Person
1st 2nd 3rd
2nd Honorific or
3rd Honorific
After a Stem
Ending in a
Consonant
After a Stem
ending in a
Vowel
1 I we Aasb aami
AabmAacute aamaraa
-S -i -S -i
2 you YOU yrsaquosb tumi EcircyabmAacute tomaraa
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
(- [=A] -a)
-Ecirc-Aacute -o
3 he
she they
it they
Ecirc se
yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
yAacute (yaatildeAacute) taa
(taahaa) yamAacute taaraa
(yaatildeamAacute taahaaraa)
-Ecirc- -e -frac12 -y
N you YOU
he
she they
Aazsp aapani
AazpamAacute aapanaaraa
sysp tini
yIumlamAacute t^aaraa
(yIumlaatildeamAacute t^aahaaraa)
-Ecirc-p -en -p -n
Study 16 1 When do we see you AabmAacute plusmnsup2p Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircissup2 aamaraa kakhan tomaake dekhi
2 When they come then we study the Bible
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) nsup2p Aaj AabmAacute ysup2p naS| taaraa (taahaaraa) yakhan aase aamaraa takhan yaai
3 This time period is bad J plusmnanot bethi e kaal manda
4 Come this week on Wednesday in the morning
J zUgraveaatilde Aafp cfAumlcam plusmnajnot e saptaah aasun buddhabaar sakaale
5 Yesterday today tomorrow sup3y plusmnanot Aacediljplusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot gata kaal aaj-ke aagaamii kaal
6 What is the address of our Hall Aabajim atildejnotm swplusmnapAacute splusmn aamaader haler thikaanaa ki
Study 17 1 Do you know that we do not make war
yrsaquosb splusmn cedilajpAacute (cedilap) Ecircn AabmAacute nfAuml plusmnsm pAacute tumi ki jaana (jaano) ye aamaraa yuddha kari naa
Study 18 1 Are we perfect or sinful AabmAacute splusmn sAuml pAacute AsAuml aamaraa ki siddha naa asiddha
2 Is this world good - or not J cedilsup3ugrave splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) - pAacute splusmn e jagat ki bhaalo (bhaala) - naa ki
Study 19
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 39 21 March 2014
1 The books of various religions are many scsvpETH ojbiacutem cSOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn Aajmiddot bibhinna dharmer
baigulo anek aache
2 The childrens parents are here Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12jim szyabayAacute Jsup2ajp Aajmiddot chelemeyeder pitaamaataa
ekhaane aache
3 Are these religions fruits good or bad J obiacuteOacutejnotam xnot splusmn vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute bethi e dharmagulor
phal ki bhaala naa manda
4 We want the deliverance of the righteous AabmAacute oasbiacuteplusmnjim bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa dhaarmik-der
mukti caai
Study 20 1 What is this J plusmnd e kii
2 Violence is the result of what satildeEgraveAacute splusmnjm xnotIcirc hindegsaa kiser phal
3 In what do you hope yrsaquosb splusmnj scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) tumi kise bishbaas karo (kara)
4 How do you know Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm cedilajpp keman kare jaanen
5 Which sayings are true plusmnd plusmnd (splusmn splusmn) plusmnuAacute yordm atildefrac12 kii kii (ki ki) kathaa satya hay
6 Why do you say that Aazsp Ecircplusmnp yAacute (yaatildeAacute) cjnotp
aapani kena taa (taahaa) balen
Study 21 1 In the picture there is a woman and three daughters
sparajecirc [pplusmnregafrac12 middotscjy] Jplusmn Aringograved JcEgrave syp Ecircbjfrac12 Aajmiddot| citre [nakashaay chabite] ek strii ebandeg tin meye aache
2 In our book there is a chapter on this very subject Aabajim cSjy JS sciquestjfrac12 Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 Aajmiddot| aamaader baite ei bisaye ek-ti adhyaay aache
3 We do a chapter on Friday AabmAacute eumlecircMcajm Jplusmnsq Aoordmafrac12 plusmnsm| aamaraa shukrabaare ek-ti adhyaay kari
4 We see many religions Is one alone right Ajpplusmn obiacute Ecircissup2| JplusmnqAacuteS splusmn suplusmn atildefrac12
anek dharma dekhi ek-taa-i ki thik hay
5 What is the effect of these prayers
J lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotam lsquozvac plusmnd e praarthanaagulor prabhaab kii
Study 22 and 23 1 We want peace and security AabmAacute regasPUgrave L spmazraquoAacute paraaS
aamaraa shaanti o niraapattaa caai
2 They get trouble and hardship yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) plusmnoslash L AfscoAacute zafrac12| taahaaraa (taaraa) kasta o
asubidhaa paay
3 Many leaders oppress the people Ajpplusmn ojbiacutem EcircpyamAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn Ayordmaparaam plusmnjm| anek dharmer netaaraa lok-ke atyaacaar kare
4 Those leaders works are bad K Ecircpyajim plusmnacedil bethi
ee netaader kaaj manda
5 Their result is peoples trouble yajim (yaatildeajim) xnot Ecircnotaplusmnjim plusmnoslash atildefrac12 taader (taahaader) phal
lok-der kasta hay
6 Does a propiatory sacrifice give us a ransom Jplusmnsq lsquozafrac12socircpararaquo csnotiap splusmn Aabajimjplusmn bfsraquoMm bgnotordm Ecircifrac12
ek-ti praayashcitta balidaan ki aamaader-ke muktir muulya dey
7 His love comes to the faithful [See Declension on Pronouns Note 6 in the dictionary] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb scregAtildeadjim plusmnajmiddot Aaj|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 40 21 March 2014
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem bishbaasiider kaache aase
8 Through him we learn the truth (Case I1)
AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn yordm sregssup2| aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) kartrrik satya shikhi
([or] AabmAacute yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) IAtildeamAacute yordm sregssup2|
aamaraa t^aar (t^aahaar) dvaaraa satya shikhi)
9 Through his love we gain forgiveness (Case I2) yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb IAtildeamAacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem dvaaraa aamaraa ksamaa paai
([or] yIumlam (yIumlaatildeam) Ecirclsquozb sijfrac12sifrac12Aacute AabmAacute ntildebAacute zaS|
t^aar (t^aahaar) prem diyediyaa aamaraa ksamaa paai)
10 We desire freedom from our sins
AabmAacute Aabajim zazOacutejnotAacute Ecircujplusmnatildejy bfsraquoM paraaS| aamaraa aamaader paap-gulo thekehate mukti caai
([or] AabmAacute Aabajim zazplusmnnot atildeSjy bfsraquoM paraaS aamaraa aamaader paap-sakal haite mukti caai)
11 Our message comes from God
Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildejyEcircujplusmn Aaj| aamaader sandegbaad iishbar hatetheke aase
( Aabajim Egravecai DregAtildem atildeSjy Aaj|
aamaader sandegbaad iishbar haite aase)
[ or Ecircsup2aiAacute khodaa]
12 We see love in our meetings among our brothers and sisters
AabmAacute Aabajim vaOacutejnotajy Aabajim vaSjcapEcircim bjoordm Ecirclsquozb Ecircissup2| aamaraa aamaader sabhaagulote aamaader bhaaibon-der madhye prem dekhi
Study 24 1 Love is indeed among us Ecirclsquozb Aabajim bjoordmS Aajmiddot| prem aamaader madhyei aache
2 This indeed [is] our life JS (SatildeaS) Aabajim cedildcp| ei (ihaai) aamaader jiiban
3 They believe in this one
yamAacute JIumljy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taaraa e^te bishbaas kare
(yaatildeamAacute SIumlatildeajy scregAtildea plusmnjm| taahaaraa i^haate bishbaas kare) 4 In this one do we not see sin JIumljy (SIumlatildeajy) AabmAacute splusmn
zaz Ecircissup2 pAacute e^te (i^haate) aamaraa ki paap dekhi naa
5 Among those ones people do not learn peace Ljim (Fatildeajim) bjoordm Ecircnotajplusmn regasPUgrave sregjsup2 pAacute| oder (uhaader) madhye loke shaanti shikhe naa
Study 25 1 This message is for you J Egravecai Ecircyabam cedilethicirc
Aajmiddot| e sandegbaad tomaar janya aache
2 Below the picture what do you read
Aazsp middotscm [pplusmnregamsparajecircm] pdjpara plusmnd Ecircijsup2p aapani chabir [nakashaarcitrer] niice kii dekhen
3 We keep our faith until the end of this world AabmAacute J cedilsup3jym Ecircregiquest zniacuteordmPUgrave Aabajim scregAtildea massup2| aamaraa e jagater shes paryyanta aamaader bishbaas raakhi
4 In front of us are many troubles Aabajim Bšfjsup2 Ajpplusmn plusmnoslash Aajmiddot| aamaader sammukhe anek kasta aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 41 21 March 2014
5 We speak about love AabmAacute Ecirclsquozb BAtildejiuml csnot| aamaraa prem sambandhe bali
6 These wars occur because of hatred J nfAumljnotAacute acutehtam plusmnamjt acutejq| e yuddhagulo ghrrinaar kaarane ghate
7 Despite their religion they fight yajim obiacute jraquocentL yamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taader dharma sattbeo taaraa yuddha kare
(yaatildeajim obiacute jraquocentL yaatildeamAacute nfAuml plusmnjm| taahaader dharma sattbeo taahaaraa yuddha kare)
8 Apart from this we do not know another reason J cordmsyjmjplusmn AabmAacute Aam Ecircplusmnap plusmnamt cedilasp pAacute| e byatireke aamaraa aar kona kaaran jaani naa
Study 26 Short Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnmjcp tini kii kar-ben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p nac| aamaraa ekhan yaaba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildejcp aapani ki okhaane haben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamajc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
5 Will you speak to him next week yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yajplusmn cnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah
taake bal-be
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zajc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paabe
Study 26 Long Form 1 What will he do sysp plusmnd plusmnsmjcp tini kii kariben
2 We will go now AabmAacute Jsup2p naSc aamaraa ekhan yaaiba
3 Will you be there Aazsp splusmn Lsup2ajp atildeSjcp aapani ki okhaane haiben
4 This name will stand forever J pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc| e naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe
5 Will you speak to him next week
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd zUgraveaatilde yaatildeajplusmn csnotjc tumi ki aagaamii saptaah taahaake balibe
6 The faithful will gain salvation scregAtildeadmAacute zsmecircat zaSjc| bishbaasiiraa paritraan paaibe
Study 27 and 28 Long Form 1 We are speaking about this work
AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildeŒjo csnotjysmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe balitechi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute (cacAacute) acutefbaSjyjmiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaaitechen
3 My mother is cooking
Aabam bIumlAacute [bayAacute] mapETHAacute plusmnsmjyjmiddotp| aamaar m^aa [maataa] raannaa karitechen
4 I am just now going out
Aasb Jsup2pS casatildejm [caSjmEcirccm] naSjysmiddot| aami ekhan-i baahire [baaireber] yaaitechi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijyjmiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa diteche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2aSjymiddot
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 42 21 March 2014
tumi kii khaaitecha
Study 29 Short Form 1 We are speaking about this work AabmAacute J plusmnacedil BAtildejiuml cnotsmiddot| aamaraa e kaaj sambandhe bal-chi
2 My father is sleeping Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] acutefbajoacutemiddotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] ghumaacchen
3 My mother is cooking Aabam bAacute mapETHAacute plusmnmjmiddotp| aamaar maa raannaa kar-chen
4 I am just now going out Aasb Jsup2pS caSjm [Ecirccm] nasoacutemiddot| aami ekhan-i baaire [ber] yaacchi
5 This message is giving hope J Egravecai AaregAacute sijoacutemiddot| e sandegbaad aashaa dicche
6 What are you eating yrsaquosb plusmnd sup2ajoacutemiddotAacute tumi kii khaaccho
Study 30 1 Can you read Bengali Aazsp splusmn caEgravenotAacute zEjy (zsEjy)| aapani ki baandeglaa parite (par-te) paaren
2 Do you want to speak English yrsaquosb splusmn SEgravejmcedild cnotjy (csnotjy) paraaL tumi ki indegrejii bal-te (balite) caao
3 We can give proof that our message is good AabmAacute lsquozbat sijy zasm Ecircn Aabajim Egravecai vajnotAacute (vanot)| aamaraa pramaan dite paari ye aamaader sandegbaad bhaalo (bhaala)
4 I try to speak Bengali
Aasb caEgravenotAacute cnotjy (csnotjy) EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnsm| aami baandeglaa bal-te (balite) cestaa kari
Study 31 1 Normally they do not want to listen
aoamty yamAacute Ecircregapjy [eumlpjyfpjy] paraafrac12 pAacute| saadhaaranatahh taaraa shon-te [shun-tesun-te] caay naa (aoamty yaatildeamAacute Ecircregaspjy [eumlspjyfspjy] paraafrac12 pAacute) saadhaaranatahh taahaaraa shonite [shunitesunite] caay naa)
2 Perhaps a few will listen today atildefrac12 EcircyAacute AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregapjc| hay to alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shon-be
(atildefrac12 y AlUacute Ecircnotaplusmn [plusmnjfrac12plusmn cedilp] Aacediljplusmn Ecircregaspjc
hay ta alpa lok [kayek jan] aaj-ke shonibe)
3 As we come regularly we will know the people spfrac12sby vajc Aajy Aajy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilapc [sparapc]| niyamita bhaabe aas-te aas-te aamaraa lok-ke jaan-ba [cin-ba]
(spfrac12sby vajc Aasjy Aasjy AabmAacute Ecircnotaplusmnjplusmn cedilaspc [sparaspc]
niyamita bhaabe aasite aasite aamaraa lok-ke jaaniba [ciniba])
4 Possibly some will want to be our brothers BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildejy paraaSjc| sambhabata kichu lok aamaader bhaai hate caaibe (BOumlcy splusmnmiddotrsaquo Ecircnotaplusmn Aabajim vaS atildeSjy paraaSjc
sambhabatahh kichu lok aamaader bhaai haite caaibe)
Study 32 1 We want peace but we get disturbance AabmAacute regasPUgrave paraaS splusmnPszlig AregasPUgrave zaS| aamaraa shaanti caai
kintu ashaanti paai
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 43 21 March 2014
2 The righteous and the unrighteous become unwell
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute JcEgrave AoasbiacutejplusmnmAacute AfAringOtilde atildefrac12 [or atildejfrac12 zjE]| dhaarmikeraa ebandeg adhaarmikeraa asustha hay [or haye pare]
3 For an imperfect man everlasting life is impossible AsAuml bapfjiquestm cedilethicirc ApPUgrave cedildcp ABOumlc atildefrac12| asiddha maanuser janya ananta jiiban asambhab hay
4 He was not without sin Ecirc zazatildedp smiddotnot pAacute| se paap-hiin chila naa
5 A person without spirit is dead and faith without works is dead
AaYšascatildedp cordmsraquoM bhy JcEgrave plusmnbiacutescatildedp [plusmnacedilscatildedp] scregAtildea bhy| aatmaabihiin byakti mrrita ebandeg karmabihiin [kaaj-bihiin] bishbaas mrrita
Study 33 1 [Option 1] I am not a perfect man Aasb sAuml bapfiquest pS (psatilde)|
aami siddha maans nai (nahi) 2 [Option 1] He is not my father he is my big brother
Ecirc Aabam szyAacute pfrac12 (pjatilde) Ecirc Aabam vaS| se aamaar pitaa nay (nahe) se aamaar bhaai
3 [Option 1] They think that we are not your neighbours
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) bjp plusmnjm Ecircn AabmAacute Ecircyabajim lsquozsyjcregdmAacute pS (psatilde)| taaraa (taahaaraa) mane kare ye aamaraa tomaader pratibeshiiraa nai (nahi)
4 [Option 1] Is that not so yaS pfrac12 splusmn (yaatildeaS pjatilde splusmn) taai nay ki (taahaai nahe ki)
5 [Option 1] He is not of this world Ecirc J cedilsup3jym pfrac12 (pjatilde)|
se e jagater nay (nahe)
6 [Option 2] In this world there is no peace J cedilsup3jy regasPUgrave EcircpS (paS)| e jagate shaanti nei (naai)
7 [Option 2] His mother is not [= He has no mother]
yam bAacute EcircpS| (yaatildeam bAacute paS|) taar maa nei (taahaar maa naai)
8 [Option 2] In him there is no bad work
yIumlajy bethi plusmnacedil EcircpS| (yIumlaatildeajy bethi plusmnacedil paS|) t^aate manda kaaj nei (t^aahaate manda kaaj naai)
9 [Option 2] There is no man like this Jbp EcircplusmnajpAacute bapfiquest EcircpS| (Jbp Ecircplusmnap bapfiquest paS|) eman kono maanus nei (eman kona maanus naai)
10 [Option 3] That work is absolutely not good J plusmnacedil vajnotAacute (vanot) pAacute| e kaaj bhaalo (bhaala) naa
11 I do not understand Aasb cfssup1 pAacute| aami bujhi naa
12 He will not go Ecirc najc (naSjc) pAacute| se yaabe (yaaibe) naa
13 YOU are not listening
EcircyabmAacute eumlpjmiddotAacute pAacute| (EcircyabmAacute eumlpjymiddot pAacute|) tomaraa shun-cho naa (tomaraa shun-techa naa)
Study 34 1 We prayed AabmAacute lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa praarthanaa kar-laam (karilaam)
We studied AabmAacute Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmnotab (plusmnsmnotab)|
aamaraa adhyayan kar-laam (karilaam)
2 She was ill Ecirc AfAringOtilde smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot)|
se asustha chilo (chila)
She was not in the meeting Ecirc vajy [vafrac12] smiddotjnotAacute (smiddotnot) pAacute| se sabhaate [sabhaay] chilo (chila) naa
3 My father went away today
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 44 21 March 2014
Aabam szyAacute [cacAacute] Aacediljplusmn parajnot Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa [baabaa] aaj-ke cale gelen
(Aabam szyAacute Aacediljplusmn parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3jnotp| aamaar pitaa aaj-ke caliyaa gelen)
He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not) se kaaje gelo (gela)
4 You ate a little but you got a lot yrsaquosb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn Ecirczjfrac12jmiddotAacute| tumi alpa kheyecho kintu anek peyecho
(yrsaquosb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12amiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn zaSfrac12amiddot|) tumi alpa khaaiyaacha kintu anek paaiyaacha
5 They stood there yIumlamAacute Lsup2ajp iIumlamajnotAacute| t^aaraa okhaane d^aaraalo (yIumlaatildeamAacute Lplusmnajp iIumlamaSnot t^aahaaraa okhaane d^aaraaila)
They showed that book
yIumlamAacute K cS Ecircisup2ajnotAacute| t^aaraa ee bai dekhaalo
(yIumlaatildeamAacute K cS Ecircisup2aSnot| t^aahaaraa ee bai dekhaaila)
6 Our brother gave the message Aabajim vaS Egravecaisq sijnotp|
aamaader bhaai sandegbaad-ti dilen
The man took a book
bapfiquestsq Jplusmnsq cS spjnotAacute (spnot)| [or Ecirc bapfiquest Jplusmnsq hellip] maanus-ti ekti bai nilo (nila) [or se maanus ek-ti hellip]
Study 35 1 They did this yamAacute J plusmnmjnotAacute| taaraa e kar-lo
(yaatildeamAacute J plusmnsmnot taahaaraa e karila)
They did not do that yamAacute K plusmnjm sp| taaraa ee kare ni (yaatildeamAacute K plusmnjm paS| taahaaraa ee kare naai)
2 He went into work Ecirc plusmnajcedil Ecircsup3jnotAacute (Ecircsup3not)| se kaaje gela (gelo)
He did not go to the meeting Ecirc vafrac12 nafrac12 sp (paS) se sabhaay yaay ni (naai)
3 The son wanted a study but his parents did not want our message Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSjnotAacute splusmnPszlig yam cacabIumlAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 sp| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caailo kintu taar baabaam^aa aamaader sandegbaad caay ni (Ecircmiddotjnotsq Jplusmnsq Aoordmfrac12p paraaSnot splusmnPszlig yaatildeam szyabayAacute Aabajim Egravecai paraafrac12 paS| cheleti ek-ti adhyayan caaila kintu taahaar pitaamaataa aamaader sandegbaad caay naai)
Study 36 1 If you come then I will show you
yrsaquosb nsi AajAacute [Aajc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2ajcAacute| tumi yadi aaso [aas-be] tabe aami tomaake dekhaabo
(yrsaquosb nsi Aa [Aasjc] yjc Aasb Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2aSc|
tumi yadi aasa [aasibe] tabe aami tomaake dekhaaiba)
2 If they kill their fellow-believers how will God be pleased yamAacute nsi yajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Pszligoslash atildejcp taaraa yadi taader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kare santusta haben
(yaatildeamAacute nsi yaatildeajim atildescregAtildeadjim atildeyordmAacute plusmnjm yjc Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Pszligoslash atildeSjcp
taahaaraa yadi taahaader sahabishbaasiider hatyaa kare tabe khodaa keman kariyaa santusta
haiben)
3 If we do not clean our lives then who will listen to our prayers
AabmAacute nsi Aabajim cedildcp[Ecircplusmn] eumlspara pAacute plusmnsm yjc Ecircplusmn Aabajim lsquozauiacutepaOacutejnotAacute eumlpjcp (eumlspjcp)| [ or plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)] aamaraa yadi aamaader jiiban[ke] shuci naa kari tabe ke aamaader praarthanaagulo shuniben
(shun-ben)
[ or kariba (kar-bo)]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 45 21 March 2014
4 If all these ones do not say just one thing among them there are liars
JmAacute nsi plusmnjnot JplusmnS plusmnuAacute pAacute cjnot yjc yajim (yaatildeajim) bjoordm sbuordmacaid Aajmiddot eraa yadi sakale ek-i kathaa naa bale tabe taader (taahaader) madhye mithyaabaadii aache
5 If we love him then we will obey his commandments
AabmAacute nsi yIumlajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa yadi t^aake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kar-bo
(AabmAacute nsi yIumlaatildeajplusmn Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm yjc AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam AaiexclaOacutejnotAacute zanotp plusmnsmc| aamaraa yadi t^aahaake prem kari tabe aamaraa t^aahaar aajnaagulo [aagyaagulo] paalan kariba)
Study 37 1 With this all will know that we are his disciples
Jjy caS cedilapjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlam sregiquestordm | ete sabaai jaan-be ye aamaraa t^aar shisya
(Satildeajy plusmnjnot cedilaspjc Ecircn AabmAacute yIumlaatildeam sregiquestordm | ihaate sakale jaanibe ye aamaraa t^aahaar shisya )
[ no need to say sregjiquestordmmAacute shisyeraa
2 Many say that the time of this world is reduced
Ajpjplusmn cjnot Ecircn J cedilsup3jym bfrac12 EgravesntildezUgrave| aneke balee ye e jagater samay sandegksipta
3 People say that their religion is right Ecircnotajplusmn cjnot Ecircn yajim (yaatildeajim) obiacute swplusmn| loke bale ye taader (taahaader) dharma thik
4 The worlds situation shows that people do not love one another
cedilsup3jym AcAringOtildeAacute Ecircisup2afrac12 Ecircn Ecircnotajplusmn zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnjm pAacute| jagater abasthaa dekhaay ye loke paraspar prem kare naa
[ or Jjplusmn Aethicircjplusmn eke anyake
or Jjplusmn Azmjplusmn eke apar-ke]
5 Everyone will get a nice place of residence and work
plusmnjnot vajnotAacute caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zajc| sakale bhaalo baasasthaan o kaaj paabe
(plusmnjnot vanot caAringOtildeap L plusmnacedil zaSjc|
sakale bhaala baasasthaan o kaaj paaibe)
Study 38 1 What do you want plusmnd paraaL kii caao
2 What [=That which] you showed [that indeed] I want
yrsaquosb nAacute Ecircisup2ajnot yaS paraaS tumi yaa dekhaale taai caai
(yrsaquosb naatildeAacute Ecircisup2aSjnot yaatildeaS paraaS tumi yaahaa dekhaaile taahaai caai)
3 Where were you yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnauafrac12 smiddotjnot tumi kothaay chile
4 Where [= into which place] you sent me there [into that place indeed] I went
yrsaquosb Ecircnsup2ajp Aabajplusmn zawajnot (zawaSjnot) Ecircsup2ajpS Aasb Ecircsup3notab| tumi yekhaane aamaake paathaale (paathaaile) sekhaane-i aami gelaam
5 When did you come yrsaquosb plusmnjc Aajnot tumi kabe aas-le
(yrsaquosb plusmnsup2p Aasjnot tumi kakhan aasile)
[ or Jjnot ele]
6 When [=At which time] you called then [at that time] I came
tumi yakhan daak-le takhan-i aami aas-laam
(tumi yakhan daakile takhan-i aami aasilaam)
[ or Ecircn bjfrac12 ye samaye]
[ or AaSnotabJnotab aailaamelaam]
7 WHO will get Jehovahs blessings
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 46 21 March 2014
Ecircplusmn snjatildeacam AaregdciacuteaiOacutejnotAacute zajc (zaSjc)| ke yihobaar aashiirbaad-gulo paabe (paaibe)
8 Those who [=Which ones] follow his will [these ones] make him happy
namAacute yIumlam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm JmAacute yIumlajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaaraa t^aar icchaa paalan kare eraa t^aake aanandita kare
(naatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeam SoacutemiddotAacute zanotp plusmnjm SatildeamAacute yIumlaatildeajplusmn Aapsethiy plusmnjm| yaahaaraa t^aahaar icchaa paalan kare
ihaaraa t^aahaake aanandita kare)
Study 39 1 We will wait until that time
AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacutePUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnmjcAacute| aamaraa se samay paryanta apeksaa kar-bo
(AabmAacute Ecirc bfrac12 zniacuteordmPUgrave AjzntildeAacute plusmnsmc|
aamaraa se samay paryyanta apeksaa kariba)
2 He will be with us until that time comes [while that time does not come]
sysp Aabajim jaring atildejcp Ecircn zniacutePUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aj| tini aamaader sansup1ge haben ye paryanta se samay naa aase
(sysp Aabajim jaring atildeSjcp nsup2p zniacuteordmPUgrave Ecirc bfrac12 pAacute Aaj|
tini aamaader sansup1ge haiben yakhan paryyanta se samay naa aase)
3 How long have you been in this country
yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacho
(yrsaquosb plusmny sip J Ecircijreg AajmiddotAacute tumi kata din e deshe aacha )
[ or ba maas or cugravem batsar]
[ or uajplusmnAacute thaako (uaplusmn thaaka)]
Study 40 1 I came to give [giving] you good news
Aasb Aazpajplusmn fbaparaam sijy Jjsmiddot (Aasfrac12asmiddot)| aami aapanaake susamaacaar dite esechi (aasiyaachi)
2 We are coming to give [for the sake of giving so as to give] hope
AabmAacute AaregAacute sicam cedilethicirc Aasmiddot (Aasjysmiddot)| aamaraa aashaa dibaar janya aas-chi (aasitechi)
3 We will come again next Friday [for the purpose] that you gain more knowledge
AabmAacute Aasup3abd eumlecircMcam AajcAacute (Aasc) Ecircnp yrsaquosb AamL iexclap zajc (zaSjc)| aamaraa aagaamii shukrabaar aas-bo (aasiba) yena tumi aar-o jnaan [gyaan] paabe (paaibe)
4 Our brother asks more questions at the end [for the purpose] that we do not forget
Aabajim vaS Ecircregjiquest AamL lsquozregETH scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp Ecircnp AabmAacute pAacute vrsaquosnot| aamaader bhaai shese aar-o prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen yena aamaraa naa bhuli
5 He asks again lest we forget
sysp Aacam scediliexclaAacute plusmnjmp zajmiddot AabmAacute Ecircvasnot| tini aabaar jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karen paache aamaraa bholi
6 I will call again before Saturday lest [so as to prevent that] you do not remember
Aasb regspcajmm Aajsup3 Aacam eaplusmnjcAacute (easplusmnc) zajmiddot yrsaquosb Aringšmt pAacute plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm)| aami shanibaarer aage aabaar daak-bo (daakiba) paache tumi smaran naa karo (kara)
Study 41 1 Many die because people make war Ajpplusmn bjm plusmnamt Ecircnotajplusmn nfAuml plusmnjm| aneke mare kaaran loke yuddha kare
2 Our brothers and sisters keep peace because we love one another
Aabajim vaSjcajpmAacute regasPUgrave majsup2 EcircplusmnppAacute AabmAacute zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnsm| aamaader bhaaiboneraa shaanti raakhe kenanaa aamaraa paraspar prem kari
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 47 21 March 2014
3 Given that YOUR word is true YOU will always love one another
Ecircyabam plusmnuAacute swplusmn atildefrac12 cjnot EcircyabmAacute c bfrac12 zmAringUacutem Ecirclsquozb plusmnmjc (plusmnsmjc)| tomaar kathaa thik hay bale tomaraa sab samay paraspar prem kar-be (karibe)
4 [In the situation of] God being almighty his name will stand forever
Ecircsup2aiAacute ciacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlaEajc| khodaa sarbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aar naam ananta kaal d^aaraabe
(Ecircsup2aiAacute CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap atildeLfrac12ajy yIumlaatildeam pab ApPUgrave plusmnanot iIumlamaSjc|
khodaa sarbbashaktimaan haoyaate t^aahaar naam ananta kaal d^aaraaibe)
[ or atildeLfrac12afrac12 haoyaay]
Study 42 1 You did not answer so I went away
yrsaquosb Fraquom EcirciL sp yaS Aasb parajnot Ecircsup3notab| tumi uttar deo ni taai aami cale gelaam
(yrsaquosb Fraquom siL paS yaS Aasb parasnotfrac12Aacute Ecircsup3notab|
tumi uttar dio naai taai aami caliyaa gelaam)
2 I was ill consequently I could not come
Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aajy zasm sp| aami asustha chilaam
sutaraandeg aas-te paari ni
(Aasb AfAringOtilde smiddotnotab fymaEgrave Aasjy zasm paS|
aami asustha chilaam sutaraandeg aasite paari naai)
3 They do not read this book so they dont rely on it
yamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yamAacute yam Fzjm spviacutem plusmnjm pAacute| taaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taaraa taar upare nirbhar kare naa
(yaatildeamAacute J cS zjE pAacute Ecirccedilethicirc yaatildeamAacute yaatildeam Fzjm spvm plusmnjm pAacute| taahaaraa e bai pare naa sejanya taahaaraa taahaar upare nirbhar kare naa)
[ or yajy taate (yaatildeajy taahaate)] 4 You do not believe in anything at all therefore you have no hope
yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnjmAacute pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute EcircpS| tumi kichuite bishbaas karo naa ataeb tomaar aashaa nei
(yrsaquosb splusmnmiddotrsaquoSjy scregAtildea plusmnm pAacute AyJc Ecircyabam AaregAacute paS|
tumi kichuite bishbaas kara naa ataeb tomaar aashaa naai)
5 Each person is involved in the issue of Jehovahs sovereignty
lsquozjyordmplusmn cordmsraquoM snjatildeacam aCAtildeiacutejvagravebjYAtildem sciquestjfrac12 cedilsEy Aajmiddot| pratyek byakti yihobaar sarbbabhoomatber bisaye jarita aache
Study 43 1 Come [wont you]
AaL pAacute JL pAacute aas-o naa es-o naa
(AaSL pAacute aais-o naa)
2 You must come
AaL JjAacute aa-so eso (AasL aasio)
3 You will come
AaEcircc Aajc aasbe aas-be (Aasjc aasibe)
4 Do not come AaEcircc pAacute Aajc pAacute aasbe naa aas-be naa
(Aasjc pAacute aasibe naa
5 Lets come Aas aasi
6 Let him come
Aafplusmn Jfplusmn aasuk esuk (AaSfplusmn aaisuk)
7 Be it that you come to Jehovah
yrsaquosb Ecircnp snjatildeacam plusmnajmiddot AajAacute (Aa) tumi yena yihobaar
kaache aaso (aasa)
[ or JjAacute eso]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 48 21 March 2014
Study 44 1 bull Did she see you
Ecirc splusmn Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jnotAacute (Ecircissup2not) se ki tomaake dekh-lo (dekhila) bull No she didnt
pAacute Ecirc Aabajplusmn Ecircijsup2 sp (paS) naa se aamaake dekhe ni (naai)
2 bull Can you come tomorrow
yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aajy zajmAacute tumi ki aagaamii kaal aas-te paaro
(yrsaquosb splusmn Aasup3abd plusmnanot Aasjy zam tumi ki aagaamii kaal aasite paara)
bull No I cant
pAacute Aasb Aajy (Aasjy) zasm pAacute| naa aami aas-te (aasite) paari naa
[or omit ldquoAasb Aajy (Aasjy)rdquo ldquoaami aas-te (aasite)rdquo ]
Study 45 1 [Short form]
Done
plusmnjm kare
come
Aaj Jj aase ese
eaten
Ecircsup2jfrac12 kheye
slept
acutefsbjfrac12 ghumiye
been
atildejfrac12 haye
taken
spjfrac12 niye
gone
ssup3jfrac12 giye
2 (Long form
Done
plusmnsmfrac12Aacute kariyaa
come
AasSfrac12Aacute aasiyaa
eaten
sup2aSfrac12Aacute khaaiyaa
slept
acutefbaSfrac12Aacute ghumaaiyaa
been
atildeIcircSfrac12Aacute haiyaa
taken
spfrac12Aacute niyaa
gone
ssup3frac12Aacute giyaa
Study 46 1 He has done much work se anek kaaj kareche
(kariyaache)
2 You have asked a good question
tumi ek-ti bhaalo prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] karecho
(tumi ek-ti bhaala prashna jijnaasaa [jigyaasaa] kariyaacha)
3 I have eaten a little but slept much
Aasb AlUacute Ecircsup2jfrac12smiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefsbjfrac12smiddot| aami alpa kheyechi kintu anek ghumiyechi
(Aasb AlUacute sup2aSfrac12asmiddot splusmnPszlig Ajpplusmn acutefbaSfrac12asmiddot| aami alpa khaaiyaachi kintu anek ghumaaiyaachi )
4 They had given me this book
yamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS sijfrac12jmiddot| taaraa aamaake e bai diyeche (yaatildeamAacute Aabajplusmn J cS
sifrac12ajmiddot| taahaaraa aamaake e bai diyaache)
5 We had all gone
AabmAacute plusmnjnot ssup3jfrac12smiddotnotab (ssup3frac12asmiddotnotab)| aamaraa sakale giyechilaam (giyaachilaam)
Study 47 1 Crying he remembered he war
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 49 21 March 2014
k^ede se yuddha smaran kar-lo (k^aadiyaa se yuddha
smaran karila)
2 By doing good you show your faith
bhaalo kare tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao
(bhaala kariyaa tumi tomaar bishbaas dekhaao)
3 This world is passing away
J cedilsup3ugrave cjatilde najoacutemiddot| e jagat bahe yaacche
[ or Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12 shes haye]
(J cedilsup3ugrave csatildefrac12Aacute naSjyjmiddot|
e jagat bahiyaa yaaiteche)
[ or Ecircregiquest atildeSfrac12Aacute shes haiyaa]
4 Todays study has finished
Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildejfrac12jsup3jmiddot| aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] hayegeche
(Aacediljplusmnm Aoordmfrac12p [Ecircregiquest] atildeSfrac12assup3frac12ajmiddot|
aaj-ker adhyayan [shes] haiyaagiyaache)
5 He got up and left
Ecirc Fjw parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| se uthe cale gelo
(Ecirc Fswfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute sup3jnot| se uthiyaa caliyaa gela)
6 They hit her and ran away
yamAacute yajplusmn Ecircbjm EcirciagravejE parajnot Ecircsup3jnotAacute| taaraa taake mere doore cale gelo
(yaatildeamAacute yaatildeajplusmn basmfrac12Aacute EcirciagravesEfrac12Aacute parasnotfrac12Aacute taahaaraa taahaake maariyaa dooraaiyaa caliyaa gela)
Study 48 1 Will the meek ones will live in peace forever
bhUcircregdjnotmAacute splusmn ApPUgrave plusmnanot regasPUgravejy cIumlaparajc (cIumlasparajc) mrridushiileraa ki ananta kaal shaantite b^aac-be (b^aacibe)
[ or pmb EcircnotajplusmnmAacute naram lokeraa]
2 Being imperfect does not help a clear conscience
AsAuml atildeLfrac12Aacute ugraveEgravejcijplusmn aatildeanordm plusmnjm pAacute| asiddha haoyaa satsandegbed-ke saahaayya kare naa
[ or eumlAuml scjcplusmnjplusmn shuddha bibek-ke]
3 He sent this message here - for what purpose
sysp J Egravecai zawajnotp (zawaSjnotp) - EcircplusmnapIcirc Fjeacutejregordm tini e sandegvaad paathaalen (paathaailen) - kon uddeshye
4 He was here in the flesh
sysp baEgravej Jsup2ajp smiddotjnotp| tini maandegse ekhaane chilen
5 This indeed is a vital work
JqaS Ayordmacocircicircplusmn plusmnacedil atildefrac12| etaa-i atyaabashyak kaaj hay
6 In order to get this knowledge we go to our meetings
J iexclap zacam (zaScam) cedilethicirc AabmAacute vajy naS| e jnaan [gyaan] paaibaar (paabaar) janya aamaraa sabhaate yaai
[ or zaLfrac12am paaoyaar]
[ or vafrac12 sabhaay]
Study 49 1 If you do work then you will eat
tumi yadi kaaj karo tabe khaabe
(tumi yadi kaaj kara tabe khaaibe)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 50 21 March 2014
2 [In the case with =] With you doing work you will eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot sup2ajc| tumi kaaj kar-le khaabe
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSjc| tumi kaaj karile khaaibe)
3 If you do not do work then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnjmAacute yjc yrsaquosb sup2ajc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa karo tabe tumi khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnm yjc yrsaquosb sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi yadi kaaj naa kara tabe tumi khaaibe naa)
4 [In the case with =] With you not doing work you will not eat
[yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2ajc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa kar-le [tumi] khaabe naa ([yrsaquosb] plusmnacedil pAacute plusmnsmjnot [yrsaquosb] sup2aSjc pAacute| [tumi] kaaj naa karile [tumi] khaaibe naa) 5 Even if you do work even then you will not eat
yrsaquosb nsiL plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute (plusmnm) ycfL plusmnajc (sup2aSjc) pAacute| tumi yadi-o kaaj karo (kara) tabu-o khaabe (khaaibe) naa
6 Even [in the case with =] with you working you will not eat
yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnotL sup2ajc pAacute| tumi kaaj kar-le-o khaabe naa
(yrsaquosb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnotL sup2aSjc pAacute| tumi kaaj karile-o khaaibe naa)
7 If you do good work you will get benefit
yrsaquosb nsi vajnotAacute plusmnacedil plusmnjmAacute notav zajc| tumi yadi bhaalo kaaj karo laabh paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi vanot plusmnacedil plusmnm notav zaSjc|
tumi yadi bhaala kaaj kara laabh paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
8 If you pray to Him in the right manner you will gain strength
yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnjmAacute regsraquoM zajc| tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa karo shakti paabe
(yrsaquosb nsi swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnm regsraquoM zaSjc|
tumi yadi thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa kara shakti paaibe)
[ or yjc yrsaquosb tabe tumi]
or
swplusmn vajc yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjnot regsraquoM zajc| thik bhaabe t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-le shakti paabe
(swplusmn vajc yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjnot regsraquoM zaSjc|
thik bhaabe t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karile shakti paaibe)
9 If he comes then he will see the message
Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekh-be
(Ecirc nsi Aaj Egravecai Ecircissup2jc| se yadi aase sandegbaad dekhibe)
or
Aajnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircisup2jc| aas-le se sandegbaad dekh-be
(Aasjnot Ecirc Egravecai Ecircissup2jc|
aasile se sandegbaad dekhibe)
10 If he does not look then he will not get the book
Ecirc nsi pAacute Ecircijsup2 yajc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| se yadi naa dekhe tabe bai paa-be (paaibe) naa
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 51 21 March 2014
pAacute Ecircisup2jnot (Ecircissup2jnot) Ecirc cS zajc (zaSjc) pAacute| naa dekh-le (dekhile) se bai paabe (paaibe) naa
11 Even if you read these words can you understand their meaning
yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zjEAacute yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yajim AuiacuteAacute cfsup1jy zamjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo paro tabe tumi ki taader artha bujh-te paar-be
(yrsaquosb nsiL J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zE yjc yrsaquosb splusmn yaatildeajim Auiacute cfssup1jy zasmjc tumi yadi-o e kathaagulo para tabe tumi ki taahaader artha bujhite paaribe)
or
J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zamjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfsup1jy zamjc e kathaagulo par-le-o tumi ki bujh-te paar-be
(J plusmnuaOacutejnotAacute zsEjnotL yrsaquosb splusmn cfssup1jy zasmjc
e kathaagulo parile-o tumi ki bujhite paaribe)
Study 50 1 He used to [= would] work here
Ecirc Jsup2ajp plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute (plusmnsmy)| se ekhaane kaaj karito (karita)
2 If I used to work then I would eat
Ecirc nsi plusmnacedil plusmnmyab yjc Ecircsup2yab| aami yadi kaaj kar-taam tabe khetaam
(Aasb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmyab yjc sup2aSyab|
aami yadi kaaj karitaam tabe khaaitaam)
or
Aasb plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2yab| aami kaaj kar-le khetaam
(AAacutesb plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSyab| aami kaaj karile khaaitaam)
3 If you would work then you would eat
yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmjyAacute yjc Ecircsup2jy| tumi yadi kaaj karito tabe khete
(yrsaquosb nsi plusmnacedil plusmnsmy yjc sup2aSjy|
tumi yadi kaaj karita tabe khaaite)
or
plusmnacedil plusmnmjnot Ecircsup2jyAacute| kaaj kar-le kheto
(plusmnacedil plusmnsmjnot sup2aSy| kaaj karile khaaita)
4 When they used to work then they would eat
yamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnmy ysup2p Ecircsup2jyAacute| taaraa yakhan kaaj kar-ta takhan kheto
(yaatildeamAacute nsup2p plusmnacedil plusmnsmy ysup2p sup2aSy|
taahaaraa yakhan kaaj karita takhan khaaita)
5 If Adam would stay perfect then he would not die
Aaib nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyAacute bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaak-to mar-to naa
(Aaib nsi sAuml uasplusmny bsmy pAacute| aadam yadi siddha thaakita marita naa )
or
Aaib sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute pAacute| aadam siddha thaak-le mar-to naa
(Aaib sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmy pAacute|
aadam siddha thaakile marita naa)
6 If YOU stayed perfect then YOU would not die
Aazsp nsi sAuml uaplusmnjyp yjc bmjyp pAacute| aapani yadi siddha thaak-ten tabe mar-ten naa
(Aazsp nsi sAuml uasplusmnjyp yjc bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani yadi siddha thaakiten tabe mariten naa)
or
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 52 21 March 2014
Aazsp sAuml uaplusmnjnot bmjyp pAacute| aapani siddha thaak-le mar-ten naa
(Aazsp sAuml uasplusmnjnot bsmjyp pAacute|
aapani siddha thaakile mariten naa)
7 [In the case with =] With Adam not staying faithful then he would die
Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uaplusmnjnot bmjyAacute| aadam bishbaasii naa thaak-le mar-to
(Aaib scregAtildead pAacute uasplusmnjnot bsmy| aadam bishbaasii naa thaakile marita)
8 They would stay in that little house
yamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uaplusmnjyAacute| taaraa ee chota baarite thaak-to
(yaatildeamAacute K Ecircmiddotaq casEjy uasplusmny|
taahaaraa ee chota baarite thaakita)
9 Even if he were visible again on the earth even then would every one accept him
sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildejyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnmjyAacute tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyata haten tabu-o sakale ki t^aake grahan kar-to (sysp nsiL Aacam zhsucdjy ihocircicircy atildeSjyp ycfL plusmnjnot splusmn yIumlaatildeajplusmn lsquosup3atildet plusmnsmy
tini yadi-o aabaar prrithibiite drrishyatahh haiten tabu-o sakale ki t^aahaake grahan karita )
10 In the case of Adam not sinning would he die or not die
Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnmjnot bmjyAacute cAacute bmjyAacute pAacute aadam paap naa kar-le mar-to baa mar-to naa
(Aaib zaz pAacute plusmnsmjnot bsmy cAacute bsmy pAacute
aadam paap naa karile marita baa marita naa)
11 Would there be [= remain] disturbance violence liars
AregasPUgrave satildeEgraveAacute sbuordmacaid splusmn uaplusmnjyAacute (uasplusmny) ashaanti hindegsaa mithyaabaadii ki thaak-to (thaakita)
12 What is your feeling about this
J BAtildejiuml Ecircyabam bjpavac splusmn e sambandhe tomaar manobhaab ki
[ or Apfvœsy anubhuuti]
13 God is looking at you and at me
Ecircsup2aiAacute Ecircyabajplusmn L Aabajplusmn Ecircisup2jmiddotp (Ecircissup2jyjmiddotp)| khodaa tomaake o aamaake dekh-chen (dekhitechen)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
14 Were you receiving love and peace
yrsaquosb splusmn Ecirclsquozb L regasPUgrave Ecirczjysmiddotjnot (zaSjysmiddotjnot)| tumi ki prem o shaanti paaitechile (petechile)
15 I was learning about Gods purposes
Aasb Ecircsup2aiamAacute FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregsup2smiddotnotab| aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikh-chilaam
(Aasb Ecircsup2aiam FjeacuteocircicircOacutejnotAacute BAtildejiuml sregssup2jysmiddotnotab|
aami khodaar uddeshyagulo sambandhe shikhitechilaam)
[ or DregAtildejmm iishbar]
16 Where were you living
Aazsp Ecircplusmnauafrac12 ca plusmnmsmiddotjnotp (plusmnsmjysmiddotjnotp)| aapani kothaay baas kar-chilen (karitechilen)
Study 51 1 [Use nije] I wrote it myself
Aasb spjcedil yAacute snotsup2notab| aami nije taa likh-laam
(Aasb spjcedil yaatildeAacute snotssup2notab|
aami nije taahaa likhilaam)
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 53 21 March 2014
2 [Use svayandeg] They learned Bengali themselves
yamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jnotAacute| taaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikh-lo
(yaatildeamAacute Atildefrac12Egrave caEgravenotAacute sregssup2not|
taahaaraa svayandeg baandeglaa shikhila)
3 [Use aapani] He himself gave [made] this promise
sysp Aazsp J lsquozsyiexclAacute plusmnmjnotp| tini aapani e pratijnaa [pratigyaa] kar-len (karilen)
4 [Decline nije] This person changed himself into Satan
J cordmsraquoM spjcediljplusmn regfrac12yajp zsmty plusmnmjnotAacute (plusmnsmnot)| e byakti nijeke shayataane parinata kar-lo (karila)
5 [Decline aapani] He gave himself in sacrifice for us
sysp Aabajim cedilethicirc Aazpajplusmn csnotiajp sijnotp| tini aamaader janya aapanaake balidaane dilen
6 [Decline nije] I wanted from myself to do this
Aasb scediljcedilm atildejy J plusmnmjy Ecircparanotab| aami nijer hate e kar-te celaam
(Aasb spjcedilm atildeSjy J plusmnsmjy Ecircparanotab|
aami nijer haite e karite caailaam)
7 [Decline aapani] He did not speak from himself
sysp AazpAacute atildejy cjnotp sp| tini aapanaa hate balen ni
(tini aapanaa haite balen naai)
8 [Decline nije] Bring your own work
spjcedilm plusmnacedil AapL (Aap) nijer kaaj aan-o (aana)
9 [Decline nije] They take their own books
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) spjcediljim cSOacutejnotAacute Ecircpfrac12| taaraa (taahaaraa) nijeder baigulo ney
[ or cS bai]
10 [Another form of nije] We examine our own lives
AabmAacute spcedil spcedil cedildcp zmdntildeAacute plusmnsm| aamaraa nij nij jiiban pariiksaa kari
11 [Decline aapan] They hate their own brothers
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnjm| taaraa (taahaaraa) aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kare
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
12 [Decline aapan] We do not hate our own brothers
AabmAacute Aazp vaSjimjplusmn acutehtAacute plusmnsm pAacute| aamaraa aapan bhaaider-ke ghrrinaa kari naa
[ or Aazpajim aapanaader]
13 [Decline aapan] YOU will know that your [=own] deliverance is near
EcircyabmAacute cedilapjc (cedilaspjc) Ecircn Ecircyabajim bfsraquoM spETHplusmnq| tomaraa jaan-be (jaanibe) ye tomaader mukti sannikat
[ or Aazp aapan]
14 Are they selfless or selfish
yamAacute (yaatildeamAacute) splusmn AtildeauiacuteatildeIcircdp pAacute Atildeauiacutezm taaraa (taahaaraa) ki svaarthahiin naa svaarthapar
15 In his words there is self-contradiction
yam (yaatildeam) plusmnuaOacutejnotam bjoordm AaYšscjmao Aajmiddot| taar (taahaar) kathaagulor madhye aatmabirodh aache
[ or plusmnuaOacutejnotam kathaagulor]
16 With there being (conditional participle of thaakaa) no doing of self-examination they deceive
themselves
AaYšzmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnmjnot yamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 54 21 March 2014
aatmapariiksaa naa kar-le taaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey
(AaYšazmdntildeAacute pAacute plusmnsmjnot yaatildeamAacute spcediljplusmn xIumlasplusmn Ecircifrac12|
aatmapariiksaa naa karile taahaaraa nij-ke ph^aaki dey)
17 In these days people seek their own interests
J plusmnajnot Ecircnotajplusmn Atildeauiacute EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnjm| e kaale loke svaartha cestaa kare
18 He will not examine us according to the work of others
sysp Aethicircjim plusmnajcedilm Apfajm Aabajimjplusmn zmdntildeAacute plusmnmjcp (plusmnsmjcp) pAacute| tini anyader kaajer anusaare aamaader-ke pariiksaa kar-ben (kariben) naa
19 Will the righteous possess the earth
oasbiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildejc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii habe
(oasBšiacutejplusmnmAacute splusmn Ecircijregm Asoplusmnamd atildeSjc dhaarmikeraa ki desher adhikaarii haibe)
20 Doing personal study is essential
cordmsraquoMsup3y Aoordmfrac12p plusmnmAacute Ayordmacocircicircplusmn| byaktigata adhyayan karaa atyaabashyak
Study 52 1 Work is done plusmnacedil plusmnmAacute atildefrac12| kaaj karaa hay
2 Prayers are said [made] lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmAacute nafrac12| praarthanaa karaa yaay
3 The Bible does get read a little caSjcnot AlUacute zEAacute nafrac12|
baaibel alpa paraa yaay
4 The Bible used to be read much more
caSjcnot Ajpplusmn Ecirccsreg zEAacute EcircnjyAacute (naSy)| baaibel anek beshii paraa yeto (yaaita)
5 The loving invitation is made known
Ecirclsquozbbfrac12 spbPogravet cedilapajpAacute (cedilapap) atildefrac12| premamay nimantran jaanaano (jaanaana) hay
6 Women and children get killed AringogravedmAacute L Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12mAacute bamAacute nafrac12|
striiraa o chelemeyeraa maaraa yaay
7 News of the kingdom is getting preached
majcedilordmm baparaam lsquozparaam plusmnmAacute najoacutemiddot (naSjyjmiddot)| raajyer samaacaar pracaar karaa yaacche (yaaiteche)
[ or sup2cm khabar]
8 It will be given to you Ecircyabajplusmn EcirciLfrac12Aacute atildejc (atildeSjc)|
tomaake deoyaa habe (haibe)
9 He will be called [spoken of as] this ones son
yIumlajplusmn JIumlm zfecirc cnotAacute najc| t^aake e^r putra balaa yaabe
(yIumlaatildeajplusmn SIumlatildeam zfecirc cnotAacute naSjc|
t^aahaake i^haar putra balaa yaaibe)
[ or Ecircmiddotjnot chele]
Study 53 1 The enemy has roared is roaring and will roar for a little more time
regecircAElig sup3scediliacutejfrac12jmiddot sup3 iacuteajoacutemiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteajc| shatru garjiyeche garjaacche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaabe
(regecircAElig sup3scediliacutefrac12ajmiddot sup3cediliacuteaSjyjmiddot L AamL AlUacute bjfrac12m cedilethicirc sup3cediliacuteaSjc| shatru garjiyaache garjaaiteche o aar-o alpa samayer janya garjaaibe)
2 How art thou yrsaquoS Ecircplusmnbp AasmiddotIcirc tui keman aachis
3 Read thy little book to him yajplusmn (yaatildeajplusmn) Ecircyam Ecircmiddotaq cS zEIcirc|
taake (taahaake) tor chota bai par
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 55 21 March 2014
4 Thy sister is laughing Ecircyam Ecirccap atildeajmiddot (atildeasjyjmiddot)|
tor bon haas-che (haasiteche)
5 A funny thing came from thee Ecircyam plusmnamiddot Ecircujplusmn atildeasm plusmnuAacute AajnotAacute (Aasnot)| tor kaach theke haasir kathaa aas-lo (aasila)
Study 54 1 How have you got hurt
yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnjm Fjparaaq Ecircsup2jfrac12jmiddotAacute tumi keman kare ucot kheyecho
(yrsaquosb Ecircplusmnbp plusmnsmfrac12Aacute Fjparaaq sup2aSfrac12amiddot tumi keman kariyaa ucot khaaiyaacha)
2 To smoke is bad for us
ofbzap plusmnmAacute Aabajim cedilethicirc sup2amaz| dhum-paan karaa aamaader janya khaaraap
3 Shall I take off my shoes
Aasb splusmn Aabam cedilrsaquoyAacute sup2fnotjcAacute (sup2fsnotc) aami ki aamaar jutaa khul-bo (khuliba)
4 I dont want to let the opportunity slip
Aasb fjnasup3 middotaEjy (middotasEjy) paraaS pAacute| aami suyog chaar-te (chaarite) caai naa
5 What sort of fruit does this path bear
J zu splusmn mplusmnb xnot ojm e path ki rakam phal dhare
[ or lsquozplusmnam mCcedilz prakaar ruup]
6 With paying attention we can learn
bjpajnasup3 sijnot AabmAacute sregsup2jy (sregssup2jy) zasm| manoyog dile aamaraa shikh-te (shikhite) paari
[ This is a conditional participle]
[ or plusmnmjnot kar-le (plusmnsmjnot karile)]
7 My writing has finished
Aabam Ecircnotsup2Aacute Ecircregiquest atildejfrac12jmiddot (atildeSfrac12ajmiddot)| aamaar lekhaa shes hayeche (haiyaache)
8 My daughter gets the giggles Aabam Ecircbjfrac12m atildeas zafrac12|
aamaar meyer haasi paay
9 Please turn on the light
ifrac12Aacute plusmnjm sccedilnotd casy aeligcentajnotAacute dayaa kare bijalii baati jvaalo
(ifrac12Aacute plusmnsmfrac12Aacute sccedilnotd casy aeligcentanotL
dayaa kariyaa bijalii baati jvaal-o )
10 It does not take much time Ajpplusmn bfrac12 notajsup3 pAacute| anek samay laage naa
11 For this book how much does it cost
J cSJm cedilethicirc plusmny qaplusmnAacute notajsup3 e bai-er janya kata taakaa laage
12 With applying a little time and logic we can see the truth
AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3ajnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircisup2jy zasm| alpa samay o yukti laagaale aamaraa satya dekh-te paari
(AlUacute bfrac12 L nfsraquoM notasup3aSjnot AabmAacute yordm Ecircissup2jy zasm|
alpa samay o yukti laagaaile aamaraa satya dekhite paari)
[ This is a conditional participle]
13 With not putting the truth to use we do not get benefit
satya kaaje naa laagaaile (laagaale) aamaraa laabh paai naa
14 I have a belief Aabam scregAtildea Aajmiddot| aamaar bishvaas aache
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 56 21 March 2014
15 They have no hope
yajim AaregAacute EcircpS| taader aashaa nei
(yaatildeajim AaregAacute paS| taahaader aashaa naai)
16 He has your message
Ecircyabam Egravecai yam (yaatildeam) plusmnajmiddot Aajmiddot| tomaar sandegbaad taar (taahaar) kaache aache
17 They do not have our book
Aabajim cS yajim plusmnajmiddot EcircpS| aamaader bai taader kaache nei
(Aabajim cS yaatildeajim plusmnajmiddot paS|
aamaader bai taahaader kaache naai)
18 One must go now
Jsup2p Ecircnjy atildejc| ekhan yete habe
(Jsup2p naSjy atildeSjc| ekhan yaaite haibe)
19 Why must [you] learn Bengali
Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregsup2jy atildejc kena baandeglaa shikh-te habe
( Ecircplusmnp caEgravenotAacute sregssup2jy atildeSjc kena baandeglaa shikhite haibe)
[ or Ecircyabam Ecircyabam IAtildeamAacute Ecircyabam plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn
tomaar tomaar dvaaraa tomaar kartrrik]
20 You must pray to him
yIumlam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnmjy atildejc| t^aar kaache praarthanaa kar-te habe
( yIumlaatildeam plusmnajmiddot lsquozauiacutepAacute plusmnsmjy atildeSjc|
t^aahaar kaache praarthanaa karite haibe)
[ or Aazpam Aazpam IAtildeamAacute AazpAacute plusmnyŸiacuteplusmn aapanaar aapanaar dvaaraa aapanaa kartrrik]
21 It [indeed] is so yaS cjq taa-i bate
(yaatildeaS cjq taahaa-i bate)
22 But you certainly want peace splusmnPszlig yrsaquosb EcircyAacute (y) regasPUgrave paraaL| kintu tumi to (ta) shaanti caao
23 Ever-lasting sparamAringOtildeafrac12d cirasthaayii
spirit-lacking AaYšascatildedp aatmaabihiin
self-loving AaYšslsquozfrac12 aatmapriya
world-wide scregAtildecordmazd bishvabyaapii
faith-worthy [fit for] scregAtildeajnasup3ordm bishvaas-yogya
24 There have been wars and famine going on
nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot| yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rayeche
(nfAumlOacutejnotAacute L Ucircsviacutentilde mjfrac12jmiddot|
yuddhagulo o durbhiksa rahiyaache)
25 Those events have been going on with us for many years
J acuteqpaOacutejnotAacute Ajpplusmn cugravem Aabajim jaring mjfrac12jmiddot (msatildefrac12ajmiddot)| e ghatanaagulo anek batsar aamaader sansup1ge rayeche (rahiyaache)
26 This world is lying in whose hands
J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnam atildejAringUgrave mjfrac12jmiddot e jagat kaar haste rayeche
(J cedilsup3ugrave plusmnaatildeam atildejAringUgrave msatildefrac12ajmiddot e jagat kaahaar haste rahiyaache)
[ or add fSfrac12Aacute suiyaa]
Study 55 1 [Qualifying] big bigger biggest
cE AamL cE cjparajfrac12 cE bara aar-o bara sab-ceye bara
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 57 21 March 2014
2 [Qualifying] good better best
vajnotAacute AamL vajnotAacute cjparajfrac12 vajnotAacute bhaalo aar-o bhaalo sab-ceye bhaalo
(vanot AamL vanot cjparajfrac12 vanot
bhaala aar-o bhaala sab-ceye bhaala)
3 [Modifying] dear dearer dearest lsquozdfrac12 lsquozdfrac12ym lsquozdfrac12yb priiya priiyatara priiyatama
4 The Greatest Man ciacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbamahaan purus
(CAtildeiacute batildeap zfmAEligiquest sarbbamahaan purus)
5 Almighty ciacuteregsraquoMbap sarbashaktimaan
(CAtildeiacuteregsraquoMbap sarbbashaktimaan)
Universal sovereignty (aciacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbabhoomatba
(aCAtildeiacutejvagravebYAtilde saarbbabhoomatba)
6 The nearest house cjparajfrac12 spplusmnq casE sab-ceye nikat baari
7 This teaching is more loving J sregntildeAacute AamL Ecirclsquozbbfrac12| e shiksaa aar-o premamay
Study 56 1 brother sister vaS Ecirccap bhaai bon
2 gentleman lady batildearegfrac12 batildearegfrac12Aacute mahaashay mahaashayaa
3 male student female student middotaecirc middotaecircd chaatra chaatrii
4 male teacher female teacher sregntildeplusmn sregsntildeplusmnAacute shiksak shiksikaa
5
Dear Mr Rahman slsquozfrac12 cedilpac maatildehellipbap [ cAacute batildearegfrac12]
priya janaab
raahmaan
[ or mahaashay]
I got your cheque Aasb Ecircyabam Ecircparaplusmnhellip Ecirczjfrac12smiddot (zaSfrac12asmiddot)|
aami tomaar cek
peyechi (paaiyaachi)
Thank you oethicirccai| dhanyabaad
Greetings Ssy [ cAacute vipdfrac12]
iti
[ or bhadaniiya]
Mrs A Target lsquoregdbyd J qajsup3iacuteq shriimatii e taarget
6 Dear Prem EcircETHjatildem ldquoEcirclsquozbrdquo sneher prem
See you on Saturday at noon Aasb regspcajm Ucirczfjm Ecircyabajplusmn Ecircisup2jcAacute (Ecircissup2c)|
aami shanibaare dupure tomaake dekh-bo (dekhiba)
Your brother Raaj Ecircyabam vaS macedil tomaar bhaai raaj
7 The son and daughter of my brother Aabam iaiAacute sisi
aamaar daadaa didi
8 Your older sisters husband Ecircyabam iaiacacf tomaar daadaabaabu
9 My younger brothers wife Aabam cFbAacute aamaar baumaa
10 My paternal grandparents Aabam waplusmnsbquom iaiabAacute aamaar thaakur-daadaamaa
11 His maternal uncle yam (yaatildeam) babAacute taar (taahaar) maamaa
12 Our paternal aunt Aabam szsbAacute aamaar pisiimaa
[ or szs pisi]
13 His parents-in-law yam (yaatildeam) regAtildeaeumlm regaeumlmd taar (taahaar) shvaashur shaashurii
14 The wifes sister-in-law Aringogravedm waplusmnsbquomssup1 striir thaakur-jhi
[ or ppi nanad]
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 58 21 March 2014
15 Our children and grandchildren
Aabajim Ecircmiddotjnotjbjfrac12 L paydpaypd aamaader chelemeye o naatiinaatanii
16 His great-grandchildren yam (yaatildeam) zfsyzfypd taar (taahaar) putiputanii
17 This husbands brother-in-law J Atildeabdm reganotAacute e svaamiir shaalaa
Study 57 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 zero one two three four five
eumlethicirc Jplusmn UcircS syp paraam zIumlapara shunya ek dui tin caar p^aac
3 six seven eight nine ten
middotfrac12 ay Aaq pfrac12 ireg chay saat aat nay dash
4 twenty thirty forty fifty
screg secircreg parasligravereg zTHORNareg bish trish callish pancaash
5 sixty seventy eighty ninety
iquestaq raquom Aasreg pCAtildeS saat sattar aashi nabbai
6 twenty-four parasCAtildereg cabbish
sixty-five zIumlfrac12iquestslsaquo p^ayasatti
7 sixty-nine Gpraquom uunasattar
ninety-nine spmapCAtildeS niraanabbai
8 a hundred two hundred three hundred
Jplusmn reg UcircS reg syp reg ek sha dui sha tin sha
9 a hundred thousand Jplusmn notntilde ek laksa
ldquothousandsrdquo atildeIacuteasoplusmn sahasraadhik
10 ten million Jplusmn EcircecircMaE ek kror [koti]
ldquomillionsrdquo notntildeasoplusmn laksaadhik
11 one and a half EcirciE der
12 two and a half AaEaS aaraai
13 five and a quarter Lfrac12Aacute zIumlapara saoyaa p^aac
14 ten and a half ajE ireg saare dash
15 ten and three quarters Ecirczagravejp Jsup3am poone egaara
16 three fifths zIumlapara vajsup3m syp vasup3 p^aac bhaager tin bhaag
17 15 per cent zjpm lsquozsy regy panera prati shat
18 the first day of the week zUgravejatildem lsquozub sip saptaaher pratham din
19 On the fiftieth day they received the spirit
zTHORNaregraquob sijp yamAacute AaYšAacute EcirczjnotAacute| pancaashattama dine taaraa aatmaa pelo
(zTHORNaregraquob sijp yaatildeamAacute AaYšAacute zaSnot|
pancaashattama dine taahaaraa aatmaa paaila)
20 the thirtieth book secircEgraveregyb cS trindegshatam bai
21 about ten days later lsquozafrac12 ireg sip zjm
praay dash din pare
22 approximately an hour acuteethqAacute sup2ajpplusmn ghantaa khaanek
23 about two days UcircJplusmn sip duek din
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 59 21 March 2014
Study 58 1 What is todays date Aacediljplusmn EcircplusmnapIcirc yasmsup2 aaj-ke kon taarikh
2 The day after tomorrow will be what day
Aasup3abd zmeuml EcircplusmnapIcirc sip atildejc (atildeSjc) aagaamii parashu kon din habe (haibe)
3 What is the season now Jsup2p EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo acuteqjmiddot (acutesqjyjmiddot)
ekhan kon rritu ghat-che (ghatiteche)
4 After six months what will the season be
middotfrac12 ba zjm EcircplusmnapIcirc Hyrsaquo atildejc (atildeSjc) chay maas pare kon rritu habe (haibe)
5 Within April May and June there are the months of beeshaakh and jyeesta
Jslsquoznot Ecircb JcEgrave cedilrsaquop baOacutejnotam bjoordm Eumlcregasup2 L Eumlcedilordmoslash ba atildefrac12| epril me ebandeg jun maas-gulor madhye beeshaakh o jyeesta maas hay
6 The summer happens then sup3hAringš ysup2p acutejq| grrisma takhan ghate
7 Thirteenth [daydatetaarikh] of February in the year nineteen hundred and ninety-five
EcircxcIacuteAEligAasm bajm EcircymS yasmsup2 FspETHreg reg zIumlparaapCAtildeS ajnot phebruaari maaser terai taarikh unnish sha p^acaanabbai saale
8 On the first [daydate] my mother will come with me
lsquozub yasmjsup2 Aabam bAacute Aabam jaring Aajcp (Aasjcp)| pratham taarikhe aamaar maa aamaar sansup1ge aas-ben (aasiben)
9 At half past two I will try again
AaEayafrac12 Aasb Aacam EcircparaoslashAacute plusmnmjcAacute (plusmnsmc)| aaraaitaay aami aabaar cestaa kar-bo (kariba)
10 Come at a quarter to four this afternoon
Aacediljplusmn Ecirczagravejp paraamqafrac12 Aafp| aaj-ke poone caar-taay aasun
11 It is three oclock sypqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot| tin-taa bejeche
(sypqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot| tin-taa baajiyaache)
12 It is eight minutes past two
UcircSqAacute Ecirccjcedil (cascedilfrac12Aacute) Aaq sbspq Aajmiddot| dui-taa beje (baajiyaa) aat minit aache
13 The train starts off at six ten Ecircqdividep middotfrac12qAacute ijreg mLpAacute atildefrac12|
tren chay-taa dashe raonaa hay
14 The meeting starts at seven twenty five in the evening
vAacute lsquozsy iumlordmajcnotafrac12 ayqafrac12 zIumlsparajreg AamBOuml atildefrac12| sabhaa prati sandhyaabelaay saat-taay p^acishe aarambha hay
15 It is twelve minutes to seven
ayqAacute cacediljy (cascediljy) cam sbspq Aajmiddot| saat-taa baaj-te (baajite) baara minit aache
16 It is now nine fifty-seven Jsup2p pfrac12qAacute ayapETH Aajmiddot|
ekhan nay-taa saataanna aache
17 What is the time [How many have struck]
plusmnqAacute Ecirccjcediljmiddot kataa bejeche
plusmnqAacute cascedilfrac12ajmiddot (kataa baajiyaache)
[ or plusmnyqAacute katataa]
What is the time [How many strike]
plusmnqAacute cajcedil kataa baaje
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 60 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 61 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 62 21 March 2014
Bengali Grammar Summary and Review
copy 1994 - 2014 B J Burford amp E J Burford 63 21 March 2014
Recommended